XDM-300 IMM ETSI B00 8.2.1-8.2.2 en

XDM-300
Version 8.2.1/8.2.2
Installation and Maintenance Manual

417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 (ETSI) Installation and Maintenance Manual V8.2.1/8.2.2 Catalog No: X38195 July 2010 8th Edition
Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2009-2010. All rights reserved worldwide. This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (ECI Telecom). BY OPENING THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM. The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright, patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or disk may be published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express prior written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed, is strictly forbidden. ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof. Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied. ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only warranty offered by ECI Telecom. The documentation and/or disk is provided AS IS and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto, unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated, and changes will be incorporated in subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice. The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by all relevant copyright, patent, and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording). Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as applicable. YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI Telecom. All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders. ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained therein, its use, or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein, howsoever caused, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions and that such instructions were understood by them. It is hereby clarified that ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failed to fulfill in whole or in part the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
About This Manual .................................................................. xiii
Overview ........................................................................................................... xiii Intended Audience ............................................................................................ xiii Document Organization ..................................................................................... xiv Document Conventions ..................................................................................... xiv Related Documentation ...................................................................................... xv Obtaining Technical Documentation ................................................................. xvi Technical Assistance......................................................................................... xvi
Installing XDM-300: Before You Start Safety Guidelines ..... 1-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-1 Warning Definition ............................................................................................ 1-2 Qualified Personnel Warning ............................................................................ 1-4 Installation Warning .......................................................................................... 1-5 General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-6 Jewelry Removal Warning ................................................................................ 1-7 Grounding Requirements ................................................................................. 1-8 Power Supply Requirements .......................................................................... 1-11 UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements ............................................. 1-17 ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements ................................ 1-19 Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-22 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge ..................................................... 1-26 Environmental and Health Concerns .............................................................. 1-30
Introduction.............................................................................. 2-1
XDM-300 Platform Overview ............................................................................ 2-1 XDM-300 I/O Protection Options ...................................................................... 2-2
Site Preparation and Rack Installation .................................. 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1 Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-5 Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................... 3-6 XDM Rack Installation Options ......................................................................... 3-7 Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-8 XDM-300 Accessories .................................................................................... 3-19 Equipment Installation .................................................................................... 3-35 Rack Installation ............................................................................................. 3-44 Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ................................................................... 3-50
417006-2311-0H3-B00
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary
Contents
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual
Platform Installation ................................................................ 4-1

Installation Options ........................................................................................... 4-1 Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Racks ............................................................. 4-7 Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf ....................................................................... 4-26
Card and Module Installation ................................................. 5-1

Installing XDM-300 Cards ................................................................................ 5-1 Installing XDM-300 Modules .......................................................................... 5-12 Installing TPU Modules .................................................................................. 5-21 Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 Shelf .................................................. 5-27
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing................. 6-1

Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks .............................................. 6-1
Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 7-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 7-1 Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2 Site Commissioning Tests ................................................................................ 7-3 Network Commissioning Tests ......................................................................... 7-6
Maintenance ............................................................................. 8-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1 Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 8-1 Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................... 8-2 Traffic Monitoring System ................................................................................. 8-6 Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 8-12 Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-20 Replacing RAP Components .......................................................................... 8-27
Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. A-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... A-1 ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors .............................................................. A-2 MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors .............................................................. A-9 PIM2_21 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-10 PIM2_42 Connection Data ............................................................................. A-13 PIM2_63/B Connection Data .......................................................................... A-19 PIM2_63S Connection Data ........................................................................... A-23 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .................................................................. A-31 ACP100 Connectors....................................................................................... A-32 xRAP-100 Connectors.................................................................................... A-33 RAP-4B Connectors ....................................................................................... A-38 xRAP-D Connectors ....................................................................................... A-42
ii
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Contents
Standards and References .................................................... B-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... B-1 Broadband Forum ............................................................................................ B-1 Environmental Standards ................................................................................. B-2 ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ............................... B-2 IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission .............................................. B-3 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ...................................... B-4 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force ............................................................ B-5 ISO: International Organization for Standardization ......................................... B-7 ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union ................................................ B-7 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum ........................................................................... B-11 NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology .................................. B-12 North American Standards ............................................................................. B-12 OMG: Object Management Group ................................................................. B-13 TMF: TeleManagement Forum ....................................................................... B-13 Web Protocol Standards ................................................................................ B-13
Index .......................................................................................... I-1
417006-2311-0H3-B00
iii
Contents
iv
417006-2311-0H3-B00
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post ........................ 1-9 Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar................................. 1-10 Figure 1-3: XDM-300 TUV CE label ............................................................................. 1-17 Figure 1-4: Power input warning label ......................................................................... 1-17 Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 1-26 Figure 1-6: XDM-300 typical temporary EPA arrangement ......................................... 1-29 Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos ............................................................................... 1-32 Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol ............................................................................ 1-32 Figure 2-1: XDM-300 shelf ............................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-2: Basic XDM-300 shelf, horizontal installation ............................................... 2-3 Figure 2-3: Basic XDM-300 shelf, vertical Installation ................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-4: XDM-300 with one TPU on top of the shelf ................................................. 2-4 Figure 2-5: XDM-300 with two TPUs ............................................................................. 2-5 Figure 2-6: XDM-300 with an OCU and two TPUs ........................................................ 2-6 Figure 3-1: XDM-300 horizontal installation space dimension....................................... 3-3 Figure 3-2: xRAP-D power supply flow ........................................................................ 3-20 Figure 3-3: xRAP-D front panel .................................................................................... 3-22 Figure 3-4: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................... 3-24 Figure 3-5: Y-cable connection .................................................................................... 3-25 Figure 3-6: Double-Y cable connection........................................................................ 3-25 Figure 3-7: xRAP-100 front panel ................................................................................ 3-27 Figure 3-8: xRAP-100 connectors ................................................................................ 3-28 Figure 3-9: RAP-BG front panel ................................................................................... 3-29 Figure 3-10: RAP-4B front panel .................................................................................. 3-31 Figure 3-11: RAP-4B alarm connectors ....................................................................... 3-32 Figure 3-12: Components of XDM-300 horizontal installation ..................................... 3-37 Figure 3-13: Components of XDM-300 vertical installation ......................................... 3-40 Figure 3-14: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks .......................................................... 3-46 Figure 3-15: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks................................................ 3-47 Figure 3-16: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead tray (2200 mm rack) ............................................................................................................ 3-48 Figure 3-17: Example of an approved European 19" rack ........................................... 3-49 Figure 3-18: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-52 Figure 3-19: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations ................................... 3-53 Figure 3-20: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud ........................................................ 3-54 Figure 3-21: xRAP-D power supply flow ...................................................................... 3-55
417006-2311-0H3-B00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v
List of Figures
Figure 3-22: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes ...................................................... 3-56 Figure 3-23: Connecting DC power cables .................................................................. 3-57 Figure 3-24: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit ............................... 3-59 Figure 3-25: Replacement spacer screw ..................................................................... 3-59 Figure 3-26: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit ............................. 3-60 Figure 3-27: Protection cover for xRAP-D ................................................................... 3-60 Figure 3-28: xRAP-D protective covers in place .......................................................... 3-61 Figure 3-29: Bottom panel for xRAP-D ........................................................................ 3-61 Figure 3-30: xRAP-D connectors ................................................................................. 3-62 Figure 3-31: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers .................................................... 3-63 Figure 3-32: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud ..................................................... 3-66 Figure 3-33: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes .................................................. 3-67 Figure 3-34: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100 ...................................... 3-68 Figure 3-35: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors .................................................... 3-69 Figure 3-36: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers ................................................ 3-70 Figure 3-37: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud ....................................................... 3-74 Figure 3-38: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes ..................................................... 3-74 Figure 3-39: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG ......................................... 3-75 Figure 3-40: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws ........................................ 3-76 Figure 3-41: RAP-BG front cover removal ................................................................... 3-77 Figure 3-42: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation ....................................................... 3-77 Figure 3-43: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions ........................................ 3-78 Figure 3-44: Location of RAP-4B grounding stud ........................................................ 3-80 Figure 3-45: Identification of RAP-4B cable routes ...................................................... 3-81 Figure 3-46: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B .......................................... 3-81 Figure 3-47: RAP-4B shelf power cable grounding screws ......................................... 3-83 Figure 3-48: RAP-4B front cover removal .................................................................... 3-84 Figure 3-49: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation ........................................................ 3-84 Figure 3-50: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions ........................................ 3-85 Figure 3-51: Cable guide.............................................................................................. 3-86 Figure 3-52: Fiber guide ............................................................................................... 3-87 Figure 3-53: Cable slack tray ....................................................................................... 3-87 Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations .................. 3-88 Figure 3-55: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations .................. 3-88 Figure 3-56: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-90 Figure 3-57: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF ............................................. 3-91 Figure 3-58: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-92 Figure 3-59: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-92 Figure 3-60: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-93
vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
List of Figures
Figure 3-61: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP ............................... 3-95 Figure 4-1: Typical XDM-300 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack ......................... 4-2 Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two XDM-300 shelves in an ETSI A rack................................................................................................................................. 4-3 Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic XDM-300 shelves in 2200 mm ETSI A rack .................................................................................................... 4-4 Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three XDM-300 shelves with TPUs in 2600 mm ETSI A rack .................................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-5: Typical XDM-300 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack ............................. 4-6 Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view .............................................................................. 4-9 Figure 4-7: Typical XDM-300 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack ....................... 4-11 Figure 4-8: Typical installation of XDM-300 and XDM-100 shelves in an ETSI A rack............................................................................................................................... 4-12 Figure 4-9: Typical installation of XDM-300 and XDM-1000 shelves in an ETSI A rack............................................................................................................................... 4-13 Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket.......................................................... 4-16 Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly ......................................................... 4-17 Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly .......................................................... 4-18 Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket ......................................................... 4-19 Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts ........................................................................... 4-20 Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts ......................................................................... 4-22 Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame .......................................................................... 4-23 Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position.................................................................... 4-24 Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter ................................................................................ 4-25 Figure 4-19: XDM-300 shelf and rack grounding ......................................................... 4-27 Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300 .................................................................................. 5-2 Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F ................................................................ 5-3 Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300 ................................................................................. 5-4 Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300............................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card ............................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide ........................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5-7: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter .................................................. 5-10 Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter ....................................................... 5-10 Figure 5-9: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots ............................................... 5-11 Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots ................................................... 5-13 Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter ............................................ 5-15 Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................. 5-17 Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the XDM-300 ..................... 5-19 Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide .................................................................... 5-20 Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (XDM-300)........................................................ 5-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
vii
List of Figures
Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300) ................................. 5-23 Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300) ................................ 5-24 Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide ........................................................................... 5-25 Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300) ................................... 5-26 Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the XDM-300 ................................... 5-28 Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the XDM-300 ..................................... 5-29 Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU ......................................................... 5-29 Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the XDM-300 ..................................................... 5-30 Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the XDM-300 ...................................................... 5-30 Figure 5-25: Installing the XDM-300 pin guides and removing the lower connector cover............................................................................................................................. 5-32 Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector ............................... 5-33 Figure 5-27: Lowering the XDM-300 onto the TPU ..................................................... 5-33 Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf ........................................................ 5-34 Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the first TPU/OCU ..................................................................................................................... 5-35 Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU ......................................................... 5-36 Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the XDM-300 ...................................................................................................................... 5-36 Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-300 ............... 5-37 Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-300 ............... 5-37 Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack ............................................... 6-2 Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable ................................................................................ 6-8 Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation ............................................................ 6-10 Figure 6-4: XDM-300 1:1 protection scheme example ................................................ 6-14 Figure 6-5: XDM-300 1:2 protection scheme example ................................................ 6-15 Figure 6-6: XDM-300 1:3 protection scheme example ................................................ 6-16 Figure 6-7: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in XDM-300 ................................... 6-17 Figure 6-8: XDM-300 1:3 protection scheme example ................................................ 6-18 Figure 6-9: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an XDM-300............................. 6-19 Figure 6-10: XDM-300 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections ............................. 6-20 Figure 6-11: RJ-45 extractor ........................................................................................ 6-25 Figure 6-12: Inserting the cables (upper row) .............................................................. 6-25 Figure 6-13: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row) ................................... 6-26 Figure 6-14: Extracting the connector (upper row) ...................................................... 6-26 Figure 6-15: Inserting the cables (lower row)............................................................... 6-27 Figure 6-16: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row) .................................... 6-27 Figure 6-17: Extracting the connector (lower row) ....................................................... 6-28 Figure 6-18: LC/SFP extractor ..................................................................................... 6-28 Figure 6-19: Inserting the fiber into the extractor ......................................................... 6-29
viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
List of Figures
Figure 6-20: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip ..................................... 6-29 Figure 6-21: Extracting the LC connector .................................................................... 6-29 Figure 6-22: Moving the connector beyond the tab ..................................................... 6-30 Figure 6-23: Removing the fiber .................................................................................. 6-30 Figure 6-24: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end ......................................... 6-30 Figure 6-25: Moving extractor's end to the connector.................................................. 6-31 Figure 6-26: Inserting the connector into the SFP ....................................................... 6-31 Figure 6-27: Moving the extractor backward................................................................ 6-31 Figure 6-28: Removing the extractor from the fiber ..................................................... 6-32 Figure 6-29: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP ............................................... 6-32 Figure 6-30: Moving the extractor forward ................................................................... 6-32 Figure 6-31: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot ............................................... 6-33 Figure 6-32: Moving extractor toward SFP clip ............................................................ 6-33 Figure 6-33: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip .................................... 6-33 Figure 6-34: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth ............................... 6-34 Figure 6-35: Releasing the SFP from housing ............................................................. 6-34 Figure 6-36: Extracting the SFP ................................................................................... 6-34 Figure 6-37: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor ............................................................................... 6-35 Figure 6-38: Placing the extractor in front of the connector ......................................... 6-36 Figure 6-39: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step ....................................... 6-36 Figure 6-40: Extracting the connector .......................................................................... 6-37 Figure 6-41: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor ........................................... 6-37 Figure 6-42: Positioning the connector in the extractor ............................................... 6-38 Figure 6-43: Inserting the connector ............................................................................ 6-38 Figure 6-44: Removing the extractor ........................................................................... 6-39 Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup ............................................................ 7-20 Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter .................................................................................... 8-5 Figure 8-2: ECU300/ECU300-F-F monitoring system interface .................................... 8-7 Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module ......................................... 8-8 Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module............................... 8-26 Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers .................................................. 8-29 Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers ...................................................... 8-30 Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification .......................................................... A-2 Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification .................................................... A-7 Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification ............................ A-7 Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification ................................................... A-8 Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions ............................................. A-9 Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................. A-10 Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification ................................................. A-13
417006-2311-0H3-B00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix
List of Figures
Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification................................. A-19 Figure A-9: PIM2_63S connector pin identification ...................................................... A-23 Figure A-10: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification ............................................. A-31 Figure A-11: ACP100 connector pin identification ....................................................... A-32 Figure A-12: DC input power connectors pin functions ............................................... A-33 Figure A-13: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification .......................... A-33 Figure A-14: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification ......................... A-35 Figure A-15: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification ............................. A-38 Figure A-16: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification ............................. A-39 Figure A-17: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions...... A-42 Figure A-18: SHELF alarm connector pin identification ............................................... A-43 Figure A-19: ALARMS connector pin identification ...................................................... A-45
417006-2311-0H3-B00
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions ................................................................................. 3-2 Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools ............................................... 3-5 Table 3-3: Equipment rack data ..................................................................................... 3-7 Table 3-4: Traffic cables mating connector data .......................................................... 3-14 Table 3-5: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU ............................ 3-15 Table 3-6: Optical fibers and mating connector data ................................................... 3-16 Table 3-7: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data .......................................... 3-17 Table 3-8: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ................... 3-17 Table 3-9: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data ......................................... 3-18 Table 3-10: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data ................... 3-18 Table 3-11: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data ...................................... 3-18 Table 3-12: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data .................. 3-19 Table 3-13: xRAP-D front panel component functions ................................................ 3-23 Table 3-14: xRAP-D connector functions..................................................................... 3-24 Table 3-15: xRAP-100 front panel component functions ............................................. 3-27 Table 3-16: xRAP-100 connectors ............................................................................... 3-28 Table 3-17: RAP-BG front panel component functions ................................................ 3-29 Table 3-18: RAP-4B front panel component functions ................................................ 3-31 Table 3-19: RAP-4B connector functions..................................................................... 3-32 Table 3-20: RAP features............................................................................................. 3-33 Table 3-21: Outline of XDM-300 horizontal installation sequence ............................... 3-38 Table 3-22: Outline of XDM-300 vertical installation sequence ................................... 3-41 Table 3-23: XDM-300 recommended circuit breakers ................................................. 3-71 Table 6-1: XDM-300 protection schemes .................................................................... 6-13 Table 6-2: XDM-300 slots allocation for protection schemes ...................................... 6-14 Table 6-3: XDM-300 1:2 I/O protection ........................................................................ 6-15 Table 6-4: XDM-300 1:3 I/O protection ........................................................................ 6-16 Table 6-5: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the XDM-300 ..................... 6-17 Table 7-1: Card and module inventory........................................................................... 7-3 Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks .................................................... 7-4 Table 7-3: Measured optical levels ................................................................................ 7-5 Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals ................................................................ 7-11 Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results............................................................ 7-17 Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test results ........................................................................ 7-18 Table 7-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals.......................................................... 7-25 Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks........................................... 8-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi
List of Tables
Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data ....................................................................... 8-10 Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems ............................................................... 8-13 Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules............................. 8-14 Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins ......... 8-15 Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules ..................... 8-15 Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux ............... 8-16 Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs ...................................................... 8-16 Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem ..................................... 8-17 Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms ...................................... 8-18 Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication......................................... 8-19 Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment............................................................. A-3 Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring ......................................................................... A-4 Table A-3: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring ..................................................................... A-5 Table A-4: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment ....................................................... A-7 Table A-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment .............................. A-8 Table A-6: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment ...................................................... A-9 Table A-7: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment ......................... A-10 Table A-8: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment ........................ A-12 Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment ................................................................................................................... A-13 Table A-10: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignment ................................................................................................................... A-16 Table A-11: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment ........ A-20 Table A-12: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment ........... A-21 Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines ................................................... A-23 Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines ................................................... A-24 Table A-15: Connector P1 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines ................................................. A-26 Table A-16: Connector P3 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Rx lines ................................................. A-27 Table A-17: Connector P1 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines ................................................. A-28 Table A-18: Connector P3 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Rx lines ................................................. A-29 Table A-19: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment ................................................ A-31 Table A-20: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment ..................................................... A-31 Table A-21: ACP100 Ethernet connector pin assignments ......................................... A-32 Table A-22: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment ............................. A-33 Table A-23: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment ............................ A-35 Table A-24: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment ................................ A-38 Table A-25: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment................................ A-40 Table A-26: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment .................................................. A-43 Table A-27: ALARMS connector pin assignment......................................................... A-45
xii
417006-2311-0H3-B00
About This Manual

In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... xiii Intended Audience ........................................................................................... xiii Document Organization ................................................................................... xiv Document Conventions ................................................................................... xiv Related Documentation .................................................................................... xv Obtaining Technical Documentation ............................................................... xvi Technical Assistance ....................................................................................... xvi
Overview
The XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual (IMM) describes how to set up, configure, and install XDM-300 shelves and their components and accessories. The manual also provides task-oriented instructions for LED indications, troubleshooting hardware-related problems, and replacing hardware components (cards, modules, accessories).
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel responsible for installing the system and its accessories. The instructions require you to understand and follow the safety practices included here, as well as any applicable national regulations and those enforced at your site. They also require that you understand the physical, optical, and electrical requirements of the installation site.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
xiii
About This Manual
Document Organization
This manual contains the following information:

Installation Maintenance Additional functionality
Document Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions.
Convention Indicates Example
Bold
Names of windows, dialog In the Alarms menu... boxes, menus, buttons and most other GUI elements Selection from a menu, or leading to another command Select Update > View Objects
Menu > Option
Italics Borders around text
New terms and emphasized Examples in text text Notes, cautions, and warnings See examples below
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying
information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to

follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
xiv
417006-2311-0H3-B00
About This Manual
LASER WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates how to avoid personal injury. All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments. ESD: Text set off in this manner indicates information on how
to avoid discharge of static electricity and subsequent damage to the unit.
TIP: Text set off in this manner includes helpful information and handy hints that can make your task easier.
IMPORTANT: Text set off in this manner presents essential information to which you must pay attention.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information supplied in this installation manual in greater or lesser detail.

XDM Converged MSPP and All-Range ROADM General Description XDM Small Shelves Reference Manual XDM System Specifications EMS-XDM (Element Management System) User Manual LightSoft (Network Management System) User Manual IEC Publication 825 Laser Safety Requirements
417006-2311-0H3-B00
xv
About This Manual
Obtaining Technical Documentation

To obtain technical documentation related to ECI Telecom products, contact: ECI Telecom Ltd. Documentation Department 30 Hasivim St. Petach Tikva 49130 Israel Fax: +972-3-9268060 Email: techdoc.feedback@ecitele.com
Technical Assistance
The configuration, installation, and operation of the XDM-300 and its operation in a network are highly specialized processes. Due to the different nature of each installation, some planning aspects may not be covered in this manual. If you have questions or concerns about your network design or if you require installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom maintains a staff of design engineers and highly trained field service personnel. The services of this group are available to customers at any time. If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation plan from ECI Telecom's Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic, contact the ECI Telecom Customer Support center at your location or our central customer support center action line at:
Telephone Telefax Email +972-3-9266000 +972-3-9266370 on.support@ecitele.com
ECI Telecom's XDM and BroadGate product lines are certified to comply with MEF9 and MEF14 standards.
xvi
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1
Installing XDM-300: Before You Start Safety Guidelines
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 1-1 Warning Definition .......................................................................................... 1-2 Qualified Personnel Warning .......................................................................... 1-4 Installation Warning ........................................................................................ 1-5 General Safety Requirements .......................................................................... 1-6 Jewelry Removal Warning .............................................................................. 1-7 Grounding Requirements ................................................................................. 1-8 Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 1-11 UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements .......................................... 1-17 ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements .............................. 1-19 Laser Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 1-22 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge .................................................... 1-25 Environmental and Health Concerns ............................................................. 1-30
Overview
This chapter describes the XDM safety guidelines. The safety rules and warnings in this chapter must be read before beginning any platform installation or maintenance work. These safety guidelines must be adhered to carefully. WARNING: XDM equipment (the "XDM Equipment" or the
"Equipment") is intended for installation in restricted access areas only.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-1
WARNING: XDM Equipment has two power sources.

Disconnect both before servicing. Before starting installation, make sure that the DC power is not connected to the rack, and that the circuit breakers in the xRAP or in the user-provided power distribution panel are set to OFF.
NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the
warnings that appear in this guide. The translated warnings are presented with the English text first, followed by these languages:

Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish
Warning Definition
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a
situation that could result in severe bodily injury. Before you work on any Equipment, be aware of the potential electrical hazards and become familiar with accident prevention measures.
ADVARSEL: Dette symbol betyder fare. Der er risiko for
alvorlig legemsbeskadigelse. Vr opmrksom p potentielle elektriske risici, og st dig ind i forholdsreglerne til uheldsforebyggelse, fr du arbejder p nogen form for udstyr.
WAARSCHUWING: Dit symbool betekent gevaar. U
verkeert in een situatie die ernstig lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u met de apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van mogelijke elektriciteitsrisicos en zich op de hoogte te stellen van maatregelen ter voorkoming van ongelukken.
VAROITUS: Tm merkki tarkoittaa vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa,

joka voi johtaa vakavaan loukkaantumiseen. Ennen kuin kytt mitn laitetta, ota huomioon mahdolliset shkiset vaaratekijt ja tutustu ennalta onnettomuuden ehkisemisohjeisiin.
1-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
ATTENTION: Ce symbole est signe de danger. Vous risquez

de graves blessures corporelles. Avant de travailler sur un appareil, vous devez avoir conscience des risques lectriques encourus et vous familiariser avec les mesures de prvention des accidents.
WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden
sich in einer Situation, die zu schwerwiegenden Verletzungen fhren kann. Bedenken Sie vor dem Gebrauch der Gerte mgliche Gefahren durch elektrischen Strom und machen Sie sich mit den Manahmen zur Unfallverhtung vertraut.
AVVERTENZA: Questo simbolo indica una situazione di
pericolo. Tale situazione potrebbe provocare gravi danni fisici. Prima di utilizzare qualsiasi dispositivo, fare attenzione ai potenziali rischi elettrici e acquisire familiarit con le eventuali misure di prevenzione. situao em que a sua sade corre srios riscos. Antes de comear a trabalhar com o equipamento, verifique o risco potencial de choque elctrico e familiarize-se com as medidas de preveno de acidente.
AVISO: Este smbolo significa perigo. Encontra-se numa
ADVERTENCIA: Este smbolo significa peligro. Est
expuesto a sufrir daos corporales serios. Antes de utilizar el equipo, tenga en cuenta la posibilidad de riesgo elctrico potencial y lea atentamente las medidas de prevencin de accidentes.
VARNING: Denna symbol betyder livsfara. Du befinner dig i

en situation som kan leda till allvarliga kroppsskador. Innan du arbetar med utrustningen mste du vara medveten om potentiella faror och knna till olycksfrebyggande tgrder.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-3
Qualified Personnel Warning

WARNING: Only trained, qualified personnel should install,
maintain, or replace the Equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kun uddannet, kvalificeret personale m installere, vedligeholde eller udskifte udstyr. WAARSCHUWING: Installatie, onderhoud of vervanging van
de apparatuur mag uitsluitend worden uitgevoerd door opgeleid en bevoegd personeel.
VAROITUS: Vain koulutettu, ptev henkilkunta saa asentaa, yllpit tai vaihtaa laitteella. ATTENTION: Seules des personnes formes et qualifies sont
habilites installer, entretenir ou changer l'quipements.
WARNUNG: Nur geschultes, qualifiziertes Personal sollte den

Ausrstung installieren, warten oder ersetzen.
AVVERTENZA: Il apparecchiature pu essere installato,

controllato o sostituito solo da personale qualificato.
AVISO: S pessoal especializado e qualificado deve instalar,

fazer a manuteno ou substituir o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: La instalacin, el mantenimiento y la VARNING: Endast utbildad, kvalificerad personal fr

installera, underhlla eller erstta utrustning.
sustitucin de este equipo slo deber realizarlo personal cualificado.
1-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installation Warning
WARNING: Before you connect the Equipment to a power
source, read the installation information in this guide.
ADVARSEL: Gennemls installationsoplysningerne i denne vejledning, fr udstyr sluttes til en strmkilde. WAARSCHUWING: Lees de aanwijzingen voor de installatie
in deze handleiding voordat u de apparatuur aansluit op een voedingsbron. asennusohjeet tst oppaasta.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin liitt laitteella virtalhteeseen, lue ATTENTION: Avant de brancher l'quipements une source
d'alimentation, lisez les instructions d'installation de ce manuel.
WARNUNG: Lesen Sie die Hinweise zur Installation in

diesem Handbuch, bevor Sie den Ausrstung an eine Stromquelle anschlieen.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di collegare il apparecchiature alla

presa di alimentazione, leggere le informazioni relative all'installazione riportate in questa guida.
AVISO: Antes de ligar o equipamento a uma fonte de energia,

leia as instrues para instalao neste guia.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de conectar el equipo a la fuente de
alimentacin, lea la informacin sobre instalacin en esta gua.
VARNING: Innan du ansluter utrustning till en strmklla ska

du lsa installationsinformationen i denna handbok.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-5
General Safety Requirements

XDM platforms contain power sources of varying voltages. Make sure to install the platforms in compliance with the following guidelines:

Be sure to use the Equipment in restricted access locations only. Note that the Equipment racks and XDM platforms are suitable for mounting on concrete or other noncombustible surfaces only. Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections. XDM platforms must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Make sure that sufficient lighting is available while working on the Equipment. Do not work on any Equipment when it is connected to a voltage source (DC or AC), except for inserting/removing cards or modules; these activities can be performed on operating Equipment. Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 50C. Use only insulated tools during installation. Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations. Do not install or maintain Equipment connected to external lines (for example, electrical tributaries) during thunderstorms. Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing platforms, cards, and modules. Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels affixed to the Equipment, and strictly observe the procedures to avoid the indicated hazards.
1-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Jewelry Removal Warning

WARNING: Before you work on Equipment that is connected
to power lines, remove any jewelry (including rings, necklaces, and watches). When connected to power and ground, metal objects may heat up and cause serious burns or weld the objects to the terminals.
ADVARSEL: Fr du arbejder p udstyr, der er sluttet til strmledninger, skal du tage evt. smykker af (f.eks. ringe, halskder og ure). Ved tilslutning til strm og jord kan metalobjekter blive varme og forrsage alvorlige forbrndinger, eller objekterne kan blive svejset fast til terminalerne. WAARSCHUWING: Voordat u aan apparatuur gaat werken
die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden, dient u sieraden (zoals ringen, kettingen en horloges) af te doen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer deze met stroom en aarde verbonden zijn en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen vastlassen.
VAROITUS: Ennen kuin tyskentelet laitteella, joka on
kytketty virtajohtoihin, riisu kaikki korut (mukaanlukien sormukset, kaulanauhat ja rannekellot). Ollessaan kosketuksissa sek shkvirtaan ett maahan, metalliesineet saattavat kuumentua ja aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsautua kiinni napoihin.
ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur un quipement connect

au secteur, enlevez tous vos bijoux (y compris les bagues, les colliers et les montres). Lorsque vous tes connect au secteur et la masse, les objets mtalliques peuvent chauffer et causer de srieuses brlures ou se souder l'appareil.
WARNUNG: Legen Sie jeglichen Schmuck (wie Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) ab, bevor Sie bei bestehender Stromzufuhr an dem Gert arbeiten. Wenn eine Verbindung zur Stromversorgung und zur Masse besteht, knnen sich Gegenstnde aus Metall erhitzen und Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlsse angeschweit werden. AVVERTENZA: Prima di utilizzare apparecchiature collegate all'alimentazione, togliersi anelli, collane e orologi e altri oggetti. Dopo aver eseguito il collegamento all'alimentazione e la messa a terra, tali oggetti metallici possono riscaldarsi e provocare la fusione di oggetti sui terminali.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-7
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que
estiver ligado corrente elctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como anis, colares e relgios). Quando esto ligados corrente e terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou at mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente. conectado a la alimentacin, deber uitarse todas las joyas que lleve (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos metlicos que estn conectados a la alimentacin y a una toma de tierra, se podran calentar y causar quemaduras graves o soldar objetos a los terminales.
ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar con un equipo que est
VARNING: Innan du utfr arbete p utrustning som r ansluten till ntsladdar ska du ta av smycken (inkl. ringar, halsband och klockor). Nr apparaten r ansluten till strm och jord kan metallfreml bli heta och orsaka allvarliga brnnskador eller svetsa fast fremlen till terminalerna.
Grounding Requirements
All equipment, including XDM platforms, ancillary units, and equipment from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise, and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth. Proper operation of the XDM Equipment requires that the positive supply line be connected to the common ground (CGND) of the site at the power source, in accordance with ETS300132-2. WARNING: When installing the Equipment, the ground
connection must always be made first and disconnected last.
ADVARSEL: Nr udstyr installeres, skal jordledningen altid monteres frst og afmonteres sidst. WAARSCHUWING: Bij het installeren van de apparatuur
moet de aarde als eerste worden aangesloten en als laatste worden afgekoppeld. tehd ensin ja laitteella viimeisen.
VAROITUS: Kun reititint asennetaan, maaliitnt pit aina ATTENTION: Lors de l'installation du quipements, la mise
la terre doit toujours tre effectue en premier et dconnecte en dernier.
WARNUNG: Bei der Installation des Ausrstung muss der

Masseleiter stets zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.
1-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
AVVERTENZA: Durante l'installazione del apparecchiature,

la connessione a terra deve essere eseguita per prima e disconnessa per ultima.
AVISO: Ao instalar o equipamento, a ligao terra deve ser

sempre a primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada.
ADVERTENCIA: Al instalar el equipo, la conexin de tierra se

deber hacer en primer lugar y se deber desconectar en ltimo lugar.
VARNING: Nr du installerar utrustning mste jordsladden kopplas in frst och kopplas ur sist.
Rack Grounding Requirements

The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt ('grounding stud') welded to the rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol label. The stud must be free of paint. The rack also has a rack grounding bar, which includes a set of grounding connection points for grounding all the different equipment used in the rack. The following figure highlights the rack grounding stud and rack grounding bar on an optical rack used in a typical XDM-3000 installation.
Figure 1-1: Optical rack grounding bar and rack frame grounding post
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-9
A connection must be made between the rack grounding bar and the site grounding bar in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations. For example, grounding may be completed by means of a copper cable with green/yellow insulation having the same diameter as the power feeding cables or thicker, and as short as possible. A length of appropriate 50 mm2 grounding cable is included with the platform accessories. A different connection bar may also be used, as long as the grounding connection is in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations. The rack grounding stud is connected to the rack grounding bar by means of a metal panel. These rack grounding connections are highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 1-2: Grounding the optical rack to the site grounding bar
1-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Equipment Grounding Requirements

Each equipment unit mounted on the rack is grounded to the rack frame by the retaining bolts and nuts attaching the unit to the rack frame. Equipment grounding is performed via the mounting brackets to the rack rails. The mounting bracket's internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must be free of paint and provide electrical continuity to the equipment frame. Check that the resistance between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame (chassis) is lower than 0.1 . WARNING: To prevent possible damage to XDM equipment,
all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting to the platform any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All grounding procedures described in Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf (on page 4-26) must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.
Power Supply Requirements

Connection via xRAP
XDM platforms require two power sources with nominal voltage of -48 VDC ranging to -57.6 VDC, having the positive line connected to the site ground. Each power source must be protected by a UL-listed circuit breaker installed in the xRAP. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation kit supplied with the Equipment, and their current ratings are therefore in accordance with the order. In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed disconnect device incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. The device must limit the maximum delivered current to a safe value.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-11
DC Power Warnings
WARNING: When connecting power, follow this wiring
sequence: ground to ground, positive lead to +RTN terminal, and negative lead to -48 V terminal. To disconnect power, perform the sequence in reverse order. The ground wire should always be connected first and disconnected last.
ADVARSEL: Ledningsfring ved strmtilslutning: Jord til jord, positiv ledning til +RTN-terminalen og negativ ledning til -48V-terminalen. Foretag dette i omvendt rkkeflge ved frakobling af strmmen. Jordledningen skal altid monteres frst og afmonteres sidst.
aan de volgende bedradingsvolgorde: aarde naar aarde, de positieve draad naar de klem +RTN en de negatieve draad naar de klem -48 V. Voor het afkoppelen past u de omgekeerde volgorde toe. De aarddraad moet altijd het eerst worden aangesloten en het laatst worden afgekoppeld.
WAARSCHUWING: Houd u bij het aansluiten van de stroom
VAROITUS: Noudata seuraavaa johdotusjrjestyst kytkiesssi virtaa: maasta maahan, positiivinen johdin +RTN-napaan ja negatiivinen johdin -48 V -napaan. Tee edellinen knteisess jrjestyksess, kun olet katkaisemassa virtaa. Maajohto tulisi aina kytke ensimmisen kiinni ja viimeisen pois. ATTENTION: Lorsque vous vous connectez au secteur,
suivez les instructions suivantes : terre la terre, cble positif vers connexion +RTN et cble ngatif vers connexion 48V. Suivez ces instructions dans l'ordre inverse pour vous dconnecter du secteur. Le cble la terre doit toujours tre connect en premier et dconnect en dernier.
WARNUNG: Beachten Sie beim Anschluss an das Stromnetz

folgende Reihenfolge der Verkabelung: Masseleiter an Masseanschluss, positiver Pol an +RTN-Anschluss und negativer Pol an -48 V-Anschluss. Verwenden Sie bei der Unterbrechung der Stromversorgung die umgekehrte Reihenfolge. Der Masseleiter sollte immer zuerst angeschlossen und zuletzt entfernt werden.
AVVERTENZA: Quando si collega il router alla presa di
alimentazione, seguire la sequenza di fili elettrici indicata di seguito: terra a terra, polo positivo sul terminale +RTN e polo negativo sul terminale -48 V. Per scollegare il router dalla presa di alimentazione, seguire la sequenza nell'ordine inverso. Il filo della terra deve essere sempre collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.
1-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
AVISO: Ao ligar a corrente elctrica, observar a seguinte sequncia de cablagem: fio de terra a fio de terra, plo positivo com terminal +RTN, e plo negativo com terminal -48 V. Para desligar a corrente, executar a sequncia em ordem inversa. O fio de terra deve ser sempre ligado em primeiro lugar e desligado em ltimo lugar. ADVERTENCIA: Cuando conecte la alimentacin, siga la
secuencia de cableado que se indica a continuacin: tierra a tierra, toma positiva a terminal +RTN, y toma negativa a terminal -48 V. Para desconectar la alimentacin, realice la secuencia en orden inverso. La toma de tierra siempre deber conectarse en primer lugar y desconectarse en ltimo.
sekvens: jord till jord, positiv sladd till +RTN-terminalen och negativ sladd till -48 V-terminalen. Utfr dessa steg i motsatt ordning nr du kopplar frn strmmen. Jordsladden br alltid kopplas in frst och kopplas ur sist.
VARNING: Nr du ansluter strmmen ska du flja denna
WARNING: Ensure the DC input wiring is connected in the

correct polarity, as reversed polarity may trip the circuit breaker or damage the Equipment.
ADVARSEL: Kontrollr, at jvnstrmstilfrselsledningen er tilsluttet med korrekt polaritet, da omvendt polaritet kan udlse brydekontakten eller beskadige udstyr. WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de ingangsbedrading voor
gelijkstroom is aangesloten op de juiste polariteit, aangezien omgekeerde polariteit de stroomonderbreker kan uitschakelen of de apparatuur kan beschadigen.
VAROITUS: Varmista, ett tasavirran syttjohdotus on

kytketty oikeisiin napoihin, sill vastakkainen napaisuus saattaa suojalaukaista katkaisijan (tripata) tai aiheuttaa vahinkoa laitteella.
ATTENTION: Assurez-vous que le cble de l'entre de
courant continu se trouve dans la bonne polarit, sinon vous risquez d'allumer le disjoncteur ou d'endommager l'quipements.
WARNUNG: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das
Gleichstromkabel an die richtige Polaritt angeschlossen ist. Andernfalls kann der Trennschalter ausgeschaltet oder der Ausrstung beschdigt werden. polarit corretta, in caso contrario pu scattare l'interruttore automatico o si pu danneggiare il apparecchiature.
AVVERTENZA: Assicurarsi che i fili CC siano collegati alla
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-13
AVISO: Certifique-se de que a ligao de entrada de corrente

feita com a polaridade adequada, pois a polaridade invertida pode fazer com que o circuito dispare ou danificar o equipamento.
ADVERTENCIA: Asegrese de que el cable de entrada de CC

est conectado con la polaridad adecuada ya que la polaridad contraria podra provocar un cortacircuitos o daar el equipo. anslutna till rtt pol. Fel pol kan leda till att strmbrytaren stngs av eller att utrustning skadas.
VARNING: Kontrollera att ingngssladdarna fr likstrm r
WARNING: When stranded wiring is used, make sure that no

stray strands protrude from the DC power entry terminals.
ADVARSEL: Nr der bruges flertrdede ledninger, skal det kontrolleres, at der ikke stikker trde ud af stikkene. WAARSCHUWING: Wanneer er geslagen bedrading wordt gebruikt, moet u ervoor zorgen dat er geen lekdraden uit de gelijkstroomingangsklemmen steken. VAROITUS: Jos kytetn johdotusta, jossa on sikeit,
varmista, ettei yksikn sie harota tasavirran syttnavoista.
assurez-vous qu'aucun brin ne dpasse des entres de courant continu.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des cbles toronns,
WARNUNG: Achten Sie bei verseilten Kabeln darauf, dass keine Litzen aus den Gleichstromanschlssen hervorstehen. AVVERTENZA: Se si utilizzano cavi a connettori multipli,
assicurarsi che nessun cavo sporga dai terminali dell'alimentazione CC.
AVISO: Quando for utilizado fio entranado, certifique-se que no ficam pontas soltas aparentes nos terminais de entrada de energia de CC. ADVERTENCIA: Si se utiliza cable trenzado, asegrese de VARNING: Om du anvnder tvinnade kablar ska du
kontrollera att inga lsa filament sticker ut frn ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm. que no se ha salido ningn hilo de los terminales de entrada de CC.
1-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
WARNING: Before working on the Equipment or near the
power entries, ensure that the power cables have been disconnected from both DC power entry terminals. Do not touch the DC power entries while the power cables are connected. Voltages may be present within the power entries when the power is switched off and the power cables are connected.
ADVARSEL: Fr der arbejdes p udstyr eller nr
strmindgangene, skal det kontrolleres, at ledningerne er taget ud af begge strmtilfrsler. Rr ikke ved strmtilfrslerne, mens ledningerne er tilsluttet. Der kan vre spnding i strmtilfrslerne, nr der er slukket for strmmen, og strmledningerne er tilsluttet.
WAARSCHUWING: Controleer of de stroomkabels zijn
afgekoppeld van beide gelijkstroomingangen, voordat u aan de apparatuur of in de buurt van de stroomingangen gaat werken. Raak de gelijkstroomingangen niet aan terwijl de stroomkabels worden aangesloten. De stroomingangen kunnen onder spanning staan wanneer de stroom wordt uitgeschakeld en de stroomkabels worden aangesloten.
VAROITUS: Ennen laitteella tai sen virtalhteiden lhell
tyskentely varmista, ett virtakaapelit on irrotettu molemmista tasavirran syttnavoista. l koske tasavirran syttkohtiin kun virtakaapelit on kytketty kiinni. Virransyttkohdissa saattaa olla viel jnnitett silloin, kun virta on kytketty pois ja virtakaapelit ovat kiinni.
ATTENTION: Avant de travailler sur l'quipements ou prs de

ses entres lectriques, assurez-vous que les cbles d'alimentation sont dconnects des deux entres de courant continu. Ne touchez pas les entres de courant continu lorsque les cbles d'alimentation sont connects. Il risque d'y avoir encore du courant dans les entres d'alimentation lorsque l'interrupteur est teint et que les cbles sont connects.
WARNUNG: Entfernen Sie vor allen Arbeiten am Ausrstung

oder nahe der Stromanschlsse die Stromkabel aus beiden Gleichstromanschlssen. Berhren Sie die Gleichstromeingnge nicht, wenn die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind. An den Stromeingngen knnen Spannungen anliegen, wenn die Stromzufuhr unterbrochen ist und die Stromkabel angeschlossen sind.
AVVERTENZA: Prima di eseguire interventi sul
apparecchiature o di avvicinarsi agli ingressi della corrente, assicurarsi che i cavi dell'alimentazione siano stati scollegati da entrambi i terminali dell'alimentazione CC. Non avvicinarsi agli ingressi dell'alimentazione CC mentre i cavi dell'alimentazione sono collegati. possibile che la tensione sia presente negli ingressi quando l'alimentazione scollegata ma i cavi sono collegati.
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-15
417006-2311-0H3-B00
AVISO: Antes de iniciar o trabalho com o equipamento que estiver ligado corrente elctrica, retire qualquer tipo de artigos de joalharia (tais como anis, colares e relgios). Quando esto ligados corrente e terra, os objectos em metal podem aquecer e provocar graves queimaduras ou at mesmo ficar soldados aos terminais de corrente. ADVERTENCIA: Antes de trabajar en el equipo o cerca de las
entradas de alimentacin, compruebe que los cables de alimentacin estn desconectados de los dos terminales de entrada de CC. No toque las entradas de CC mientras que los cables de alimentacin estn conectados. Es posible que haya corriente en las entradas de alimentacin cuando el equipo est apagado y los cables de alimentacin estn conectados. strmingngarna ska du kontrollera att ntsladdarna har kopplats ur frn bda ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm. Rr inte ingngsterminalerna fr likstrm nr ntsladdarna r inkopplade. Det kan finnas strm kvar i strmingngarna nr strmmen r av och ntsladdarna r inkopplade.
VARNING: Innan du arbetar med utrustning eller i nrheten av
Electric Safety Warning

WARNING: Do not touch uninsulated wiring or ports when ADVARSEL: Rr ikke ved uisolerede ledninger eller porte, nr de ikke er koblet fra strmkilden, da det kan medfre elektrisk std. WAARSCHUWING: Raak geen ongesoleerde bedrading of
poorten aan wanneer deze niet zijn afgekoppeld van de voeding, aangezien dit een elektrische schok kan veroorzaken. jos ne ovat kytkksiss virtalhteeseen, sill tst voi seurata shkisku. they have not been disconnected from a power source, as doing so may result in electrical shock.
VAROITUS: l koske eristmttmiin johtoihin tai napoihin, ATTENTION: Ne touchez pas les cbles ou ports non isols WARNUNG: Berhren Sie keine unisolierten Kabel oder
lorsqu'ils ne sont pas dconnects du secteur, car vous risquez de vous lectrocuter.
Anschlsse, wenn sie noch an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind, da dies zu einem Stromschlag fhren knnte.
AVVERTENZA: Evitare di toccare i cavi o le porte non isolate

quando sono ancora collegati alla presa di alimentazione, poich si potrebbero verificare scosse elettriche.
1-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
AVISO: No tocar na cablagem aparente ou nas portas de
entrada de corrente que no tiverem sido desligadas da fonte de energia, pois desse facto podem resultar choques elctricos.
ADVERTENCIA: No toque los puertos ni los cables que no
estn aislados si no estn desconectados de la fuente de alimentacin ya que podra provocar una descarga elctrica.
VARNING: Rr inte sladdar eller portar som inte r isolerade

om de inte har kopplats ur frn strmkllan. Det kan leda till elektriska sttar.
UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements

This section outlines the UL/TUV statutory warnings and requirements applicable to XDM platforms.
Identification of TUV CE Listing

XDM-300 shelves are TUV CE-listed. The following is a typical TUV CE label for XDM-300 shelves.
Figure 1-3: XDM-300 TUV CE label
Warning Label
The following warning label is affixed alongside the XDM power input connectors and the xRAP circuit breakers.
Figure 1-4: Power input warning label
CAUTION: XDM Equipment has two power sources.

Disconnect both power sources before servicing.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-17
UL/TUV Overcurrent Protection Requirements

NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are
according to Classification Level 5 (L5) for power supplies having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV circuits.
WARNING: When replacing circuit breakers, observe the

following precautions:
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating. Disconnect power before changing a circuit breaker.
ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection contre les risques dincendie, remplacer par un fusible de mme type et de mmes caractristiques nominales.
UL/TUV Equipment Grounding Requirements

CAUTION: The Equipment must have a connection between
the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the Equipment grounding conductor.
Connect the Equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected. Locate the Equipment in the same immediate area (for example, in adjacent racks) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounding conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded elsewhere. Position the DC supply source in the same premises as this Equipment. There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
1-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
UL/TUV Requirements for Grounded Conductors

Connect the Equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected. Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the Equipment. There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements

This section outlines the ITU-T and Telcordia statutory warnings and requirements applicable to XDM platforms. The source for these requirements can be found in IEC 60950-1/3.2.1.2.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-19
DC Supply Circuit Connection to the Grounding Conductor

WARNING: The Equipment must have a connection between
the grounded conductor of the DC power supply circuit and the Equipment grounding conductor. See installation instructions for more details. When this connection is made, all the following conditions must be met:
This Equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor, or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected. This Equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere. The DC supply source shall be located within the same premises as this Equipment. There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
1-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
WARNING: Cet appareil est conu pour permettre le
raccordement du conducteur reli la terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. au conducteur de terre de lappareil. Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent tre respectes:
Ce matriel doit tre raccord directement au conducteur de la prise de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. ou une tresse de mise la masse relie une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccorde llectrode de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccords au conducteur de terre du mme circuit dalimentation c.c. doivent tre installs proximit les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires adjacentes) et proximit de la prise de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. Le circuit dalimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise de terre. La source dalimentation du circuit c.c. doit tre situe dans la mme pice que le matriel. Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la source dalimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement la prise de terre.
Ethernet Port Precautions

WARNINGS:
Ethernet ports must be cabled with shielded cables and the shield grounded at both ends. Intra-building ports of the Equipment or subassembly are suitable for connection to intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. Intra-building ports of the Equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-21
Laser Safety Requirements

Laser Classification
ECI Telecom Equipment and components equipped with laser devices described in this manual comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety standards, including IEC 60825-1 and IEC 60825-2 (AS/NZS 2211.2) - Safety of Laser Products. Except for certain high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers, XDM Equipment is classified as Class 1 laser products. The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light and the beam is totally enclosed during normal operating modes of customer operation. As long as the Equipment is operated in accordance with the applicable safety instructions, the Hazard Level in Equipment access locations is inherently Class 1M or lower. The high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers are also classified as Class 1M (or lower) laser products. Note that the high power EDFA and Raman optical amplifiers emit power within Hazard Level 3B and Hazard Level 4, even though they are classified as Class 1 or Class 1M. Hazard level might be higher than the product class, depending on network implementation and fiber accessibility. ECI Telecom provides product and installation information in order that the products may be installed and serviced safely.
Laser Information
See the XDM System Specification for information regarding the laser transmitters of the various optical cards available for the XDM platforms.
Warning Labels for Laser Products

The following labels are affixed to optical cards and modules near the optical connectors to indicate that the product is classified as a Class 1 laser product. The following labels are affixed to optical cards and modules with a laser near the optical connectors to indicate that the product is classified as a Class 1M laser product.
1-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Laser Safety Statutory Warning

All personnel involved in Equipment installation, operation, and maintenance must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly observe the applicable safety precautions and, in particular, must avoid staring into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments. Remember that observing safety precautions is not a matter of personal choice: ignoring safety puts all the people within line of sight in danger!
Training for Laser Safety

Personnel must be trained for safety before being authorized to operate, install, and/or maintain laser products. The IEC 60825 (AS/NZS 2211.2) standards require organizations to appoint a laser safety officer who is responsible for training personnel, establishing safe operational procedures, and supervising the implementation of these procedures during routine work. Untrained personnel must not be allowed to operate, install, and/or maintain laser products.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-23
Laser Device Operating Precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in bodily injury and damage to equipment. WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous
radiation:
During maintenance and other activities performed on equipment using lasers, protection goggles with nominal OD2 for the wavelength range of 1300 nm to 1600 nm are recommended. Protection goggles are mandatory for tasks performed on equipment with up to 30 dBm optical power lasers. Hot insertion or swapping of a DWDM module or optical interface module should be carried out only by authorized personnel. During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination, avoid looking into the fiber to prevent irremediable damage to your eyes. Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber terminations that are not currently in use. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures associated with the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only ECI Telecom authorized service technicians to repair the unit. To avoid potential fiber fusing, burnt connectors, or loss of laser power, ensure all high power connections are clean before you power up the optical amplifier.
It is strictly forbidden to override any protective devices and interlocks used to prevent direct exposure to the laser beam.
1-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
WARNING: Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the

aperture of optical ports when no fiber cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open apertures.
ADVARSEL: Der kan forekomme usynlige laserstrler fra de

optiske portes bninger, nr der ikke er tilsluttet et lyslederkabel. Undg at blive udsat for disse strler, og kig ikke ind i bninger.
WAARSCHUWING: Er kan onzichtbare laserstraling uit de opening van de optische poorten komen wanneer er geen fiberkabel is aangesloten. Vermijd blootstelling aan straling en kijk niet in de openingen. VAROITUS: Optisten porttien aukoista saattaa steill nkymtnt lasersteily silloin, kun niiss ei ole kuitukaapeleita kiinni. Vlt altistumista ja l tuijota nihin avoimiin aukkoihin. ATTENTION: Un rayonnement laser invisible peut tre mis partir de l'ouverture des ports optiques lorsque aucun cble fibres optiques n'est connect. vitez de vous y exposer et ne fixez pas les ouvertures. WARNUNG: Wenn kein Faserkabel angeschlossen ist, knnen aus der ffnung der optischen Anschlsse Laserstrahlen austreten. Vermeiden Sie Bestrahlungen und schauen Sie nicht in diese ffnungen. AVVERTENZA: Le aperture delle porte ottiche possono emettere radiazioni laser invisibili quando i cavi in fibra non sono collegati. Evitare lunghe esposizioni davanti alle aperture. AVISO: Podem ser emitidas radiaes invisveis de laser a
partir das aberturas das portas pticas se no estiver ligado qualquer cabo de fibra ptica. Evitar a exposio e no olhar directamente pelas aberturas aparentes. emita desde la apertura de puertos pticos cuando no haya ningn cable de fibra conectado. Evite la exposicin y no mire fijamente a las aberturas.
ADVERTENCIA: Es posible que la radiacin lser invisible se
VARNING: Osynlig laserstrlning kan spridas frn ppningen
p optiska portar om ingen fiberoptikkabel r ansluten. Undvik exponering och stirra inte in i ppningarna.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-25
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge

This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of XDM Equipment and its components against damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD) during handling, packaging/unpackaging, transportation, installation, commissioning, inspection, servicing, and maintenance works. Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge or include sensitive items are identified by the basic ESD warning symbol shown in the following figure.
Figure 1-5: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information in this section presents generally accepted workmanship practices and procedures that, when properly applied, minimize the probability of electrostatic damage to XDM Equipment and its components. The information is also in line with CENELEC Electronic Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015 that deals with protection of devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS).
General
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be damaged by electrostatic discharges. An electrostatic discharge between two objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches, or is brought near enough to the other object. Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of insulating materials or separation of two such surfaces, and may also be induced by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an insulating floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and so on, can easily build charges up to levels that may cause damage, especially when humidity is low. In many cases, the build-up of charges can be avoided by using special materials, for example, garments and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistivity but are not insulators.
1-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
The best approach to avoiding damage by ESD includes a combination of means and procedures that achieves the following goals:

Avoid build-up of electrostatic charges Create a protected work environment that helps prevent ESD Provide means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic charges when entering the protected work environment NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with minimum risk of damage as a result of electrostatic discharge or fields, and in which the operator is not exposed to additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, Equipment is handled in work spaces especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in many cases, the environment in which the same Equipment is installed or maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled boundary. Therefore, all the work requiring the handling of unprotected ESDS must be considered as field work. Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance, installation, site inspection, and commissioning of components and assemblies classified as ESDS, together with the packaging and unpackaging activities associated with such activities. All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material quality and personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packaging.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-27
Use of Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA arrangement suitable for field work on XDM-300 equipment is shown in the following figure. The EPA tool kit includes:

Wrist strap with 1 M series resistor Bonding strap with 1 M series resistor ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or flooring capable of providing protection against ESD. CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a way
that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used, and prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in potential within the EPA that could cause unacceptable voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDs.
1-28
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 1-6: XDM-300 typical temporary EPA arrangement
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-29
Work Arrangements within a Temporary EPA

To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field work within a temporary EPA area:
All operators working within a temporary EPA area must wear, as a minimum, an antistatic protecting garment made of cotton. If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to walk and move within that area, then the floor must be capable of providing protection against ESD. The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling an ESDS. If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS from Equipment and transfer it to a temporary work surface away from the Equipment, the ESDS must be given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding of the operator to ground is maintained. An ESDS must be placed directly into protective packaging upon removal from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its protective packing until required for immediate installation in the equipment. The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the place of the field work at service time. All tools intended for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be so constructed that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.
Environmental and Health Concerns

ECI Telecom is committed to achieving high standards of environmental quality and product safety. The International Standardization Organization (ISO) has developed the internationally recognized standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. These are quality management standards developed by ISO and administered by independent accreditation and certification bodies. ISO 9000 is a family of standards for quality management systems. ISO 9000 has been accepted as a model when assessing the adequacy of quality management systems. Some of the requirements in ISO 9001 (which is one of the standards in the ISO 9000 family) include:

Procedures that cover all key business processes Process monitoring to ensure effectiveness Adequate record keeping
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-30
Monitoring output for defects, with appropriate and corrective action where necessary Regular review of individual processes and the complete quality system as a whole Facilitating continual improvement
ISO 14000 is the international specification for an Environmental Management System (EMS). It specifies requirements for establishing an environmental policy, determining environmental aspects and impacts of products, activities, and services, planning environmental objectives and measurable targets, implementation and operation of programs to meet objectives and targets, checking and corrective action, and management review. ECI Telecom Quality and Environmental Management Systems were certified to these ISO standards and are periodically audited by third-party organizations. ECI Telecom policies and products meet the spirit of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Design for the Environment (DfE) Program to reduce risk to people and the environment by preventing pollution and improving energy efficiency. ECI Telecom is also certified to OHSAS 18000, which was developed as a standard against which occupational safety management systems can objectively be assessed. OHSAS 18000 (compatible with ISO 9001 and ISO 14001) is being developed through a concerted effort from a number of the world's leading national standards bodies, certification bodies, and specialist consultancies. As a part of ECI Telecoms environmental commitment and in pursuit of compliance with applicable environmental legislation, ECI Telecom makes every effort to ensure that its products supplied to the EU market are compliant with the RoHS Europe directive restricting use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. ECI Telecom also requires RoHS compliance from all its suppliers. All new electrical and electronic equipment delivered to locations within the EU do not contain any cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), hexavalent chromium compounds (Cr6+), mercury (Hg), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB), or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE), subject to certain exemptions and limitations as outlined in the RoHS directive. Without limiting the generality of the preceding statement, we wish to stress that use of lead in solders in network infrastructure Equipment has been exempted by the RoHS directive and may be found in certain ECI Telecom products.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-31
All Equipment delivered to locations within the EU complies with the requirements of the RoHS Europe directive. Similarly, ECI Telecom Equipment is compliant with the RoHS California directive and RoHS Chinese directive where relevant. All ECI Telecom Equipment included in the Electronic Information Products (EIP) category includes a table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements, verifying hazardous substance levels in accordance with the RoHS China directive. Equipment documentation includes the appropriate Environmental Protection Use Period (EPUP) lifespan symbol indicating the point in time when the equipment may be expected to enter the recycling system. Examples of these pollution control symbols are illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 1-7: Pollution control logos
NOTE: The number in Logo 2 is for illustrative purposes only.

When in actual use, the number that appears indicates the corresponding environmental protection use period of the product.
ECI Telecom adheres to the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive requiring that all new products placed on the EU market be labeled with the crossed-out wheeled bin recycling symbol defined by CENELEC standard EN 50419 and accepted by the Member States. Note that specific WEEE procedures may differ from Member State to Member State, depending on the local implementation of the WEEE requirements.
Figure 1-8: WEEE recycling symbol
Do not dispose of ECI Telecom Equipment and accessories together with standard household waste. Please check with ECI Telecom technical support for more information about product disposal, including recycling and reuse. For more information about ECI Telecom's environmental, health, and safety policy, see the quality policy pages on the ECI Telecom website. (Environmental, Health, and Safety Policy http://www.ecitele.com/AboutECI/Quality/Pages/EnvironmentalHealthSafetyP olicy.aspx)
1-32 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
For any further information regarding ECI Telecom's environmental and safety policies, please contact technical support. WARNING: The ultimate disposal of this product should be
handled according to national laws and regulations.
ADVARSEL: Endelig bortskaffelse af dette produkt skal ske i overensstemmelse med nationale love og regler. WAARSCHUWING: Dit product dient overeenkomstig de nationale wetgeving en voorschriften te worden weggegooid. VAROITUS: Tmn tuotteen lopullinen hvittminen tulee
tehd kansallisten lakien ja asetusten mukaisesti.
ATTENTION: La mise au rebut de ce produit devrait se faire

conformment aux lois et rglementations de chaque pays.
WARNUNG: Entsorgen Sie dieses Produkt entsprechend den

geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften.
AVVERTENZA: L'utilizzo di questo prodotto deve essere conforme alle leggi e alle normative nazionali. AVISO: A destruio final deste produto deve ser feita de acordo com as leis e regulamentos nacionais. ADVERTENCIA: Este producto debe utilizarse de acuerdo a
las normas y leyes nacionales.
VARNING: Slutlig kassering av denna produkt br hanteras

enligt nationella lagar och riktlinjer.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
1-33
1-34
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2
Introduction
In this chapter:
XDM-300 Platform Overview ......................................................................... 2-1 XDM-300 I/O Protection Options ................................................................... 2-2
XDM-300 Platform Overview

ECI Telecom's XDM-300 is a powerful flexible MSPP optimized for metro networks. It supports multitude technologies in a cost-effective fashion to address the market increasing traffic demands. The XDM-300 supports scalable STM-1/4/16/64/OTN aggregates and flexible access topologies. It offers a wide range of features and benefits including:

Carrier class Ethernet as well as traditional SDH voice-centric services. Gradual in-service capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs. An optical connection operating at a specific STM rate can be upgraded from STM-1 to STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 without affecting traffic. Sublambda grooming resulting in high utilization of existing fibers and top efficiency in transmission of different types of services. Support of CWDM, OADM, transponder, combiner, OFA, and other optical cards and modules used to process, amplify, and monitor multichannel signals.
The XDM-300 shelf was designed to facilitate simple installation and maintenance. Hot insertion of cards and modules is allowed, supporting quick maintenance and repair without affecting traffic.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2-1
Introduction
For a detailed description of the XDM-300 platform, see the XDM Converged MSPP and All-Range ROADM General Description.
Figure 2-1: XDM-300 shelf
XDM-300 I/O Protection Options

The XDM-300 shelf boasts an extremely high modular design with two module cages, one in the upper part, one in the lower part, and a card cage in the middle. An expansion TPU shelf that adds protection capabilities to the I/O modules can be mounted on top and under the shelf. An expansion OCU shelf that adds CWDM networking capabilities to the XDM-300 can be mounted on top of the upper TPU or directly on top of the XDM-300 shelf. Protection of I/O modules in the upper and lower module cages is supported. CAUTION: When the XDM-300 shelf is to be installed
vertically, pay attention to position the shelf with the FCU300 facing downwards, to ensure proper air flow to the XDM-300.
Basic XDM-300 Shelf

The basic XDM-300 shelf is housed in a 246 mm (9.68 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.44 in.) wide, and 350 mm (13.78 in.) high equipment cage. The shelf consists of two module cages, one in the upper part, the second in the lower part, and a card cage in the middle. Each module cage can house up to 8 I/O modules, totaling 16 modules in the entire shelf. The card cage accommodates two MXC300 cards (main and protection), an External Connection Unit (ECU300/ECU300-F or ECU300/ECU300-F_F), and two wide I/O cards. When I/O cards are not used in the wide slots, they can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 module each, using a mechanical adapter. I/O protection is not supported in this option.
2-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Introduction
The XDM-300 shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.
Figure 2-2: Basic XDM-300 shelf, horizontal installation
Figure 2-3: Basic XDM-300 shelf, vertical Installation
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2-3
Introduction
Expanded XDM-300 with I/O Protection

The following I/O protection options are supported for XDM-300 shelves installed in a horizontal position:
A TPU mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the upper module cage. A TPU attached under the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the lower module cage. Two TPUs, one mounted on top of the basic shelf protecting the I/O modules in the upper cage, and one attached under the shelf protecting the I/O modules in the lower cage.
Each TPU adds only 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the XDM-300 shelf. Each TPM is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the shelf in a 1:1, 1:2, or 1:3 configuration. If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the active MXC via the TC module in the TPU switches the traffic from the active I/O module to the protection module. The following figures show several options for installing TPUs with the XDM-300 shelf.
Figure 2-4: XDM-300 with one TPU on top of the shelf
2-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Introduction
Figure 2-5: XDM-300 with two TPUs
Similar I/O protection options are supported for XDM-300 shelves installed in a vertical position.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2-5
Introduction
XDM-300 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities

An OCU can be mounted on top of the basic shelf or on top of a TPU installed on the basic shelf to add CWDM networking capabilities to the platform. The OCU can accept various CWDM modules like Mux/DeMux, splitters/couplers, OADMs, and power amplifiers. Each expansion shelf (TPU or OCU) adds 75 mm (3 in.) to the height of the XDM-300. NOTE: The OCU is not supported for installation under the
XDM-300 shelf.
A typical XDM-300 shelf with an OCU (and two TPUs) is shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-6: XDM-300 with an OCU and two TPUs
2-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3
Site Preparation and Rack Installation
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 3-1 Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 3-5 Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection ................................................. 3-6 XDM Rack Installation Options ...................................................................... 3-7 Preparing Cables and Fibers ............................................................................ 3-8 XDM-300 Accessories .................................................................................. 3-19 Equipment Installation ................................................................................... 3-35 Rack Installation ............................................................................................ 3-44 Installing Ancillary Units in Racks ............................................................... 3-50
Overview
The following sections describe the conditions required for installing the equipment at the site.
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration the following issues:

System environmental requirements Physical location of the XDM-300 shelves Location of power sources Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm monitoring, and so on) Work and equipment safety requirements
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-1
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Environmental Requirements
The following environmental conditions must be provided at the installation site.
Parameter Compliance requirements
Electromagnetic interference Temperature
FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022-2/2003, EN 50082-1/97 ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Main Equipment Dimensions

Table 3-1: Equipment dimensions Equipment type Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max. weight (kg)
XDM-300 TPU XDM-300 + TPU XDM-300 + two TPUs XDM-300 + two TPUs + OCU xRAP-100 xRAP-B xRAP-D xDDF-21 FST ODF
350 75 425 500 575 133 133 133 44.5 44.5 44.5
443 443 443 443 443 445 445 445 440 440 440
246 246 246 246 246 185 185 185 150 240 240
8.2 (shelf only) 30 (fully populated) 5.5 (shelf only) 10 (fully populated) 13.7 (shelves only) 40 (fully populated) 21.9 (shelves only) 50 (fully populated) 30.1 (shelves only) 60 (fully populated) 10 9.5 9.5 3 5 8
3-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 3-1: XDM-300 horizontal installation space dimension
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-3
Physical Location
WARNING: XDM-300 shelves are intended for installation in restricted access areas only. Choose the physical location of the XDM-300 shelves, taking the following aspects into consideration: 1. Equipment dimensions, as specified in the following table. 2. Required floor loading capability: 150 kg per rack for a typical 4-shelf installation. 3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring, and management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to cables and fibers, it is recommended to use overhead cable ladders whenever possible, to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack. When a network management station, for example EMS-XDM, is installed on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network management station and the maximum allowed distance.
Power Sources
XDM equipment must be powered only by DC sources in compliance with the applicable sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19PFL1, and the SELV of EN 60950-1 requirements. The nominal supply voltage is -48 VDC (positive lead grounded); the allowed supply voltage range is -40 VDC to -57.6 VDC. For redundancy, two separate DC power sources should be available. The power consumption of the XDM-300 is:

Typical: 800 W Maximum: 1100 W NOTE: If the input power connected to one of the xINFs
exceeds -57.6 VDC, both xINFs are shut down and the shelf is switched off.
3-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician toolbox are required for the installation of XDM-300 shelves. Since traffic cables can be prepared on site, suitable tool kits should also be available. This includes tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see the following table) and tools for the preparation of optical patch cords.
Table 3-2: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools No. Name Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
Stripper Center contact crimp tool (blue) Crimp tool, outer Cable stripper Nipper (cutter for center contact) Die for NCX1
DIN 1.0/2.3 DIN 1.0/2.3 DIN 1.0/2.3 NCX1 NCX1 NCX1
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, clean the optical connectors using the standard cleaning kits recommended by the optical connector manufacturers.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-5
Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection

Before you start: Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes. Evidence of damage should be reported immediately to the carrier, the project manager, and your local ECI Telecom representative. CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
Proper handling and grounding precautions required XDM-300 equipment contains components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection Against Electrostatic Discharge. Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them. The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection to internal connectors.
You must unpack the equipment on a clean flat surface. To unpack the equipment: 1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a short knife so as not to damage the internal items, and open the top flaps. 2. Remove the items contained in the box and inspect each item for damage. Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, shelf, and auxiliary equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables. NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors
until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be present. 4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not remove the modules/cards from their individual protective packages until they can be inserted in the shelf. 5. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing, notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative.
3-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM Rack Installation Options

XDM platforms can be installed in the following rack types:
ECI Telecom's recommended enhanced ETSI optical racks (hereafter referred to as the optical rack), or the improved ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI A). These racks have been specially adapted by ECI Telecom and are tailored to meet platform requirements and simplify platform installation and maintenance, including the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient maintenance of all rack cables, including:

Control cables Power cables Data cables (where relevant)
Two channels on the racks front rails for routing up to 400 (ETSI A) or 800 (optical rack) optical fibers. Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders. Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see Environmental Requirements). Front door for left or right opening mounting.
Standard ETSI racks (hereafter referred to as ETSI B). ISO 19 racks and standard US racks. These racks should be used only in consultation with and when approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical Department.
XDM racks options are summarized in the following table.

Table 3-3: Equipment rack data
Type Height Width Depth Available space
Optical Rack ETSI A ETSI A ETSI B ETSI B US US ISO 19
2200 mm 2200 mm 2600 mm 2200 mm 2600 mm 7 ft (2134 mm) 7 ft (2134 mm) 7.25 ft (2200 mm)
600 mm 600 mm 600 mm 600 mm 600 mm 23 in. (585 mm) 19 in. (483 mm) 24 in. (600 mm)
300 mm 300 mm 300 mm 300 mm 300 mm 12 in. (305 mm) 12 in. (305 mm) 24 in. (600 mm)
47U (2100 mm) 46U (2050 mm) 55U (2450 mm) 46U (2050 mm) 55U (2450 mm) 44U (6.5 ft/1960 mm) 44U (6.5 ft/1960 mm) 47U (6.85 ft/2089 mm)
The loading of a fully equipped rack is 7.35 kn/m2, or 55.35 kn/ft.2.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-7
NOTES:
Not all XDM platforms can be installed in all types of racks. This section includes a general list of the rack options available. The installation instructions for each platform include a list of the racks appropriate for that platform. The installation instructions in this manual are written on the basis of an installation using an ECI Telecom enhanced rack. Some of these instructions may not be relevant if you are using a standard rack supplied by other vendors. Before any installation plan can be completed, a site survey by ECI Telecom technical support team is required, to verify rack accessibility and accessory compatibility at that site. If you are working with standard racks from other vendors, the site survey is also essential to determine what changes are required to adapt the rack to XDM platform installation requirements.
All ECI Telecom XDM equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. Some of these installation options are described in Installing Equipment Racks. If your facility uses a different installation paradigm, contact the ECI Telecom Technical Support team for additional information.
Preparing Cables and Fibers

NOTE: This section provides information for preparing cables
and optical fibers. The necessary cables can also be ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales representative.
The main cables required for installing the XDM-300 include:

Grounding cables, described in Grounding Cables (on page 3-9) DC power cables, described in DC Power Cables (on page 3-11) Alarm cables, described in Alarm Cables (on page 3-13) Management cables, described in Management Cables (on page 3-13) Timing (clock) cables, described in Timing (Clock) Cables (on page 3-14) Electric traffic cables, described in Electric Traffic Cables (on page 3-14) Optical fibers, described in Optical Fibers (on page 3-16) Data cables for data modules, described in Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs (on page 3-17) as applicable
3-8
DC power and traffic cables should be prepared on site. AC power cables suitable for connection to the power outlet types specified when placing the order (according to the site specifications) and the control and alarm cables used within XDM equipment racks, are included in the shipment with power outlets provided according to the site specifications. The following sections provide information to enable you to prepare cables on site. Refer to Connector Pin Assignments (on page A-1) for a description of the equipment connector types and cable wiring. WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and
grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the specified types. Components must also comply with any applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified trained personnel may be involved in the preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable workmanship practice.
Grounding Cables
Rack equipment is bonded through the screws that fasten the equipment chassis to the frame of the rack. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a reliable low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site grounding bus using copper conductors. Equipment installed in racks is bonded through the screws used to fasten the equipment chassis to the frame of the rack. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a reliable low-impedance connection between the rack frame and the site grounding bus using copper conductors. Make the connection between the rack grounding screw and the site grounding bar by means of a copper lead with green/yellow insulation having the same diameter as the RAP input power cable or thicker, in compliance with UL/ETSI recommendations. The end of the lead connected to a RAP, as used in the rack, must be terminated in an M8 lug. Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole compression lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. WARNING: The ground cable must be of at least the same
thickness as the RAP power cable.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-9
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to XDM equipment,

all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting to the platform any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All grounding procedures described in Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.
WARNING: This equipment is designed to permit the
connection of the grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment. See installation instructions for more details. When this connection is made, all of the following conditions must be met:
This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor, or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus to which the DC supply system earthing electrode is connected. This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, as well as the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be grounded elsewhere. The DC supply source shall be located within the same premises as this equipment. There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.
3-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
WARNING: Cet appareil est conu pour permettre le
raccordement du conducteur reli la terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. au conducteur de terre de lappareil.
Pour ce raccordement, toutes les conditions suivantes doivent tre respectes:
Ce matriel doit tre raccord directement au conducteur de la prise de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. ou une tresse de mise la masse relie une barre omnibus de terre laquelle est raccorde llectrode de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. Les appareils dont les conducteurs de terre respectifs sont raccords au conducteur de terre du mme circuit dalimentation c.c. doivent tre installs proximit les uns des autres (p.ex., dans des armoires adjacentes) et proximit de la prise de terre du circuit dalimentation c.c. Le circuit dalimentation c.c. ne doit comporter aucune autre prise de terre. La source dalimentation du circuit c.c. doit tre situe dans la mme pice que le matriel. Il ne doit y avoir aucun dispositif de commutation ou de sectionnement entre le point de raccordement au conducteur de la source dalimentation c.c. et le point de raccordement la prise de terre.
DC Power Cables
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.
NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
DC power cables should be prepared on site. Two types of DC power cables are needed:

RAP input power cables Shelf power cables
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-11
RAP input power cables

The RAP input power cables are prepared on site. They connect input power from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input terminals of the rack's RAP panel. Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative conductor, or as required in your area of residence. The RAP cable ends must be terminated in cable lugs matching the conductor gauge with M8 lugs for all RAP types (xRAP-D, RAP-BG, xRAP-100, or RAP-4B). The recommended cable gauge is 0 AWG (50 mm2/.078 inch2) or thicker for the xRAP-D, and 2 AWG (35 mm2/.054 in.2) or thicker for the xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or RAP-4B. This gauge ensures that the voltage drop across the rack power cable at full power consumption does not exceed 2 V, even for cable runs up to 30 meters (99 feet) connected to a RAP providing power to two XDM shelves. When an xRAP is used to provide power to a single XDM shelf, lower lead gauges may be used:
For cable runs not exceeding 20 meters (66 feet), it is sufficient to use 16 mm2 (.025 inch2) copper leads. For cable runs not exceeding 30 meters (99 feet), it is sufficient to use 25 mm2 (.039 inch2) copper leads. NOTE:
If necessary, the gauge of the grounding lead can also be reduced to the gauge of the power leads, that is, 16 mm2 (.025 in.2) for lengths up to 20 meters (66 feet), and 25 mm2 (.039 in.2) for lengths up to 30 meters (99 feet). The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that thickness. The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.
Shelf power cables

Two 12 AWG (25 mm) cables supplied by ECI Telecom are used to connect the two redundant input power sources from the RAP panel to the POWER connectors on the MXC300-A and MXC300-B cards of each XDM-300 shelf installed in the rack.
3-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used are included in the shipment according to the site specifications. Alarm indications are carried by the following cables:
Shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf alarm indication cable is required for each XDM-300 shelf installed in the rack. One end of the cable is always connected to the ALARMS connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F card. Connection of the other end depends on the cable type, as follows:
xRAP-100 alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-100. xRAP-B alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-B. xRAP-D alarm cable. Connects to one of the SHELF connectors on the xRAP-D. Client alarm cable. Connects to the client's alarm collecting facility.
Bay alarm cable. One bay alarm cable is required for each rack. This cable carries the alarm indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). One end of the cable is connected to the RAP, the other end is open and connects to the client's alarm collecting facility. Two types of this cable are available:
xRAP-100 bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARM IN/OUT connector on the xRAP-100. xRAP-B bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the xRAP-B. xRAP-D bay alarm cable. Connects to the ALARMS connector on the xRAP-D.
Management Cables
Out-of-band management communication is connected to an XDM-300 by means of a minihub with a pair of the RJ-45 Ethernet connectors located on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F or ECU300/ECU300-F cards. If one XDM-300 is installed, the connection is made to the management MAIN RJ-45 connector. If more than one XDM-300 is installed in the same site, it is possible to save the use of an external hub. In this case, the first system is connected as explained above, and the other systems are connected in an Ethernet daisy chain. The management MAIN connector of each system is connected to the management PROT/LCT connector of the previous system. Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources. Cables of Category 3 or better must be used. The length of the cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub port in use (up to a few dozen meters).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-13
Timing (Clock) Cables

The ECU300/ECU300-F on the XDM-300 shelf has two timing reference connectors, T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2, which are used for 2.048 Mbps signals and have balanced (120 ) G.703 interfaces. The cables used to connect to these connectors are prepared on site, and they comprise individually shielded twisted pairs (the same type of pairs needed for connection to the balanced E1 tributary interfaces). If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 ) G.703 interfaces, a 120 /75 adapter can be supplied for mounting on the T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors. This permits using coaxial cables (BT3002 or equivalent) of the same type used for connecting to balanced E1 tributary interfaces.
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared on site. The following table lists the type of cables and mating connectors needed for each XDM-300 traffic interface type. NOTE: The connectors are identical regardless of whether the
traffic cables are connected directly to the I/O modules or to TPMs on the TPU.
Table 3-4: Traffic cables mating connector data I/O module Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/ Module
PIM2_21
E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps) E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps) E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps) E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps) E3 and DS-3 (34/45 Mbps)
Twin multipair cable (2 x 25 Twin 50-pin SCSI male shielded 120 twisted pairs)
PIM2_42
Twin multipair cable (2 x 25 100-pin SCSI 2 male shielded 120 twisted pairs) Twin multipair cable (2 x 25 Twin 50-pin SCSI male shielded 120 twisted pairs) 3 x twin multipair cable (2 x 2 x 136-pin 25 shielded 120 twisted VHDCI male pairs) NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 male 3
PIM2_63/B PIM2_63 PIM2_63S
PIM345_3
3-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
I/O module
Interface type
Cable type
Mating connector
Qty/ Module
SIM1_4/E SIM1_8 1
STM-1 electrical STM-1 electrical
NCX coaxial cable NCX coaxial cable
DIN1.0/2.3 male DIN1.0/2.3 low profile male
8 16
When a TPU is used, additional patch traffic cables between PIMs and TPMs are required, as described in the following table.
Table 3-5: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU TPM Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/ Module
TPM2_1
E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)
Twin multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 twisted pairs) Twin multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 twisted pairs) Twin multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 twisted pairs) Triple multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 twisted pairs) Twin multipair cable (25 pairs of shielded 120 twisted pairs) RG179x8 multicoaxial cable
PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI female TPM: 100-pin SCSI female PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI female TPM: 100-pin SCSI female PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male
TPM2_3
TPM2_42_2 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)
TPM2_63_2 E1 balanced (2.048 Mbps)
PIM2_63: Triple twins of 1 50-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male PIM2_42: 100-pin SCSI male TPM: Twin 136-pin VHDCI male PIM: DIN1.0/2.3 male TPM: 8W8 D-type 1
TPMH_1
E3 and DS-3 (34/45 Mbps) STM-1 electrical
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 electrical module with ETR-1 electrical SFP transceivers. ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-15
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared on site. Use only 2 mm optical fibers to connect to optical interfaces. For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed on site. The optical fibers should enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the rack side rails, and end at the FST. The tray must contain enough fiber length for extracting modules from the XDM-300 and for replacing fiber in case of damage (splicing repairs). When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35 mm). The following table lists the type of fibers and mating connectors needed to prepare fibers for each XDM-300 module/card.
Table 3-6: Optical fibers and mating connector data I/O module/card Interface type Fiber type Mating connector Qty/ Module/Card
SIM1_4/OB SIM1_4/O SIM1_8 2 SIM4_2 SIM4_4 SIM16_1 SIM16_2 SIM16_4 SIM64_XFP SIM64_2
STM-1 optical STM-1 optical STM-4 optical STM-4 optical STM-16 STM-16 STM-16 STM-64 STM-64
1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface 1 pair of fiber patch LC male cords per interface
8 fibers 16 fibers 4 fibers 8 fibers 2 fibers 4 fibers 8 fibers 2 fibers 4 fibers
SIM1_8 configured as STM-1 optical module with OTR-1 optical SFP transceivers. ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-16
Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs

Data modules like EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs are connected by electrical cables or optical fibers according to the interface type being connected. Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected by CAT5E SFTP 4-pair cables terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Table 3-7: EISM optical fibers and mating connector data EISMB module Port no. Interface type Fiber type Mating connector Qty/ module
EISMB_840 1-2
GbE/FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 m LC male MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 m SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE 1 pair of 50/62.5 m MM fiber patch cords per interface for FE
8 fibers
3-4
FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 m LC male MM fiber patch cords per interface
EISMB_840 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the following table. The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the EISMB_804 module.
Table 3-8: EISMB Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data EISMB module Port no. Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/ module
EISMB_804 1-2 3-4
10/100/1000BaseT 10/100BaseT
CAT5E SFTP RJ-45 4-pair CAT5E SFTP RJ-45 4-pair
2 2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-17
Table 3-9: DIOM optical fibers and mating connector data DIOM module Port no. Interface type Fiber type Mating connector Qty/ module
DIOM_40
1-4
GbE/FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male m MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 m SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE 1 pair of 50/62.5 m MM fiber patch cords per interface for FE
8 fibers
DIOM_40 can also be equipped as a mixed module including optical and electrical interfaces by inserting an electrical SFP in the port. The cabling to such port is made as a connection to an electrical interface listed in the following table. The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the DIOM electrical modules.
Table 3-10: DIOM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data DIOM module Port no. Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/ module
DIOM_04 DIOM_08
1-4 1-8
10/100/1000BaseT 10/100BaseT
CAT5E SFTP 4-pair CAT5E SFTP 4-pair
RJ-45 RJ-45
4 8
Table 3-11: MCSM optical fibers and mating connector data MCSM module Port no. Interface type Fiber type Mating connector Qty/ module
MCSM
1-8
GbE/FE
1 pair of 50/62.5 LC male m MM fiber, or 1 pair of 9 m SM fiber patch cords per interface for GbE 1 pair of 50/62.5 m MM fiber patch cords per interface for FE
16 fibers
3-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
The following table lists the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating connectors needed for the MCSM module.
Table 3-12: MCSM Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data MCSM module Port no. Interface type Cable type Mating connector Qty/ module
MCSM
9-16
10/100BaseT
CAT5E SFTP 4-pair
RJ-45
XDM-300 Accessories
ECI Telecom offers accessories for efficient and optimal installation of equipment in racks. This section describes the main types of accessories. If you need custom modification to standard items, contact ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division support team or your ECI Telecom sales representative.
xRAP-D
The xRAP-D is a power distribution and alarm panel for XDM platforms installed in racks. The xRAP-D performs the following main functions:
Redundant power distribution for one or two XDM platforms. The xRAP-D can support either one or two XDM platforms. Each platform can work with either one or two power inputs, where one is the main power input (A) and the second is an optional protective backup power input (B). The xRAP-D can work with up to two redundant input power sources, depending on the user's electric infrastructure. In the default configuration, the xRAP-D supplies independent streams of power to two separate XDM platforms. Input power for one XDM platform is kept completely separate from the input power for the second XDM platform. Separate input power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the xRAP-D unit. (There are a total of four circuit breakers on the xRAP-D, supporting redundant power supplies for up to two XDM platforms.) The power supply flow for two platforms is illustrated in the following figure.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-19
Figure 3-2: xRAP-D power supply flow
The xRAP-D has four 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to any platform in the XDM-1000 or XDM-100 family of products. The maximum power supplied to each XDM platform is up to 2250 W, in accordance with the platform type and version. Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply sources to the xRAP-D do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be more than 55A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W. Previous xRAP units used a single heavy duty power cable to supply power for up to two XDM platforms. The xRAP-D enables independent power delivery to two shelves through separate cables, enabling use of thinner cables and smaller circuit breakers. The xRAP-D was developed in response to the needs of customers who are not able to support large aggregate power feeding requirements when supporting two XDM platforms.
3-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable
from their main power supply (and optionally, a single power cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a single cable if they either: Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support a single XDM platform only, with a maximum of 2250 W for that platform. Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two XDM platforms, where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. This configuration option requires the use of an optional metal bridge component designed by ECI Telecom for this purpose. (Note that this configuration option is only available from V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations on maximum power consumption.) Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support two XDM platforms, with a maximum of 2250 W for each platform. This configuration option requires the use of an optional metal bridge component designed by ECI Telecom for this purpose.
For more information about the bridge-component configuration options, see Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC, ranging to -57.6 VDC. The internal circuits of the xRAP-D are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-D is indicated by a POWER ON indicator. Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker that also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the XDM-300 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-D installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breakers state, the circuit breakers can be reached easily after opening the front cover of the xRAP-D. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-D includes four alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm indications light simultaneously. A buzzer is activated whenever a Critical alarm is present in XDM platforms connected to the xRAP-D.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-21
Connecting external alarms from two XDM platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's central alarm monitoring system. Customers who wish to define external alarms should refer to the explanation of electrical capacity requirements for external alarms in the XDM System Specification. Note that the xRAP-D supports up to eight external alarms. These alarms are by default allocated four to each platform. ECI Telecom offers the option, when working with a single XDM-1000 platform, to define up to eight external alarms for that XDM-1000 platform. A second XDM platform cannot be used with the xRAP-D when working with this configuration, and a special alarm connection cable must be used. Contact ECI Telecom technical support for more information.
Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four for each XDM platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's central alarm monitoring system. Exporting Critical buzzer signals. The Critical alarm signal is provided via dry contacts to the customer's central alarm monitoring system for activation of a Critical buzzer. A separate line is provided as well for muting this buzzer, by connecting the line to a ground with a momentary switch. NOTE: Note that the xRAP-D supports the same alarm and power functions as the xRAP-B and xRAP-HP. When replacing an existing xRAP-HP with an xRAP-D you must also use the appropriate xRAP-D accessory kit, including cables.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-D, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-3: xRAP-D front panel
3-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Table 3-13: xRAP-D front panel component functions No. Designation Function
SOURCE A
Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers (designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 one per XDM platform installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A. Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes. Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP-D. Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Critical. Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Major. Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Minor. White indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D is Warning. Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in the platforms connected to the xRAP-D. Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
2 3 4
TEST POWER ON CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
Buzzer (concealed under cover) SOURCE B
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-23
The xRAP-D connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figures.
Figure 3-4: xRAP-D connectors Table 3-14: xRAP-D connector functions No. Designation Function
1, 2
Shelf 1 and Shelf 2 Two 5-pin D-type connectors, designated Shelf 1 DC input power and Shelf 2, used to connect DC power to the XDM platforms. ALARMS 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the received from the XDM platforms by the SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm outputs, and XDM severity alarms. Two 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1 and SHELF 2, used to connect alarm cables to the XDM platforms installed in the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the XDM platform to the xRAP unit.
4, 5
SHELF 1 and SHELF 2
Alarm signals arrive at a SHELF connector on the xRAP unit from two different connector sources on the XDM platform using a Y-Cable.
A 9-pin connector on the XDM platform labeled xRAP is used for the four XDM severity alarms. (CRITICAL, MAJOR, MINOR, and WARNING) A 50-pin connector on the XDM platform labeled ALARMS is used for any external alarms defined by client request.
3-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A Y-Cable is used to link these two connector sources to the single SHELF connection point on the xRAP, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-5: Y-cable connection
The xRAP-D supports up to eight input plus eight output external alarms. These alarms are by default allocated four to each platform. ECI Telecom offers the option, when working with a single XDM-1000 platform, to define up to eight external input plus eight external output alarms for that XDM-1000 platform. When working with this configuration, a second XDM platform cannot be connected to the xRAP-D and a special double-Y alarm connection cable must be used, as illustrated in the following figure. Contact ECI Telecom technical support for more information.
Figure 3-6: Double-Y cable connection
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-25
xRAP-100
The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for XDM and BG shelves installed in racks. The xRAP-100 performs the following main functions:
Power distribution for up to four XDM or BG shelves: The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC. Since XDM and BG shelves can use redundant power sources, the xRAP-100 supports connection to two separate DC power circuits. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100 are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator. Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the XDM or BG shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The xRAP-100 is designed to support three XDM or BG regular shelves and one high-power XDM shelf, or four regular XDM or BG shelves. It has three 3-pin D-type connectors and one 5-pin D-type high-power connector for feeding the shelves. Each 3-pin connector can supply power to one of the following regular shelves:

XDM-50 XDM-100 XDM-500 XDM-40 Any BG shelf
The 5-pin high-power connector can supply power to one of the above regular shelves, or to one of the following high-power shelves:

XDM-300 XDM-900 XDM-1000 XDM-2000 NOTE: When a regular XDM or BG shelf has to be connected
to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type male to 3-pin D-type female adapter cable.
The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-100 installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breakers state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP-100. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through the cover.
3-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes four alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously. NOTE: BG shelves support only two alarm indications: Major and Minor. A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in XDM shelves connected to the xRAP-100. In case of BG shelves connected to the xRAP-100, the buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm is present in the BG shelves.
Connection of alarms from up to four XDM or BG shelves, each shelf with maximum four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-7: xRAP-100 front panel Table 3-15: xRAP-100 front panel component functions No. Designation Function
SOURCE A
Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 one per XDM-300 shelf installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.
--
Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or (Concealed under Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the cover) xRAP-100. TEST POWER ON CRITICAL Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes. Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP-100. Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Critical.
2 3 4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-27
No.
Designation
Function
5 6 7 8
MAJOR MINOR WARNING SOURCE B
Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Major. Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Minor. White indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the xRAP-100 is Warning. Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.
Figure 3-8: xRAP-100 connectors Table 3-16: xRAP-100 connectors No. Designation Function
1, 2, 3, 4
Shelf alarms
Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines to XDM or BG shelves and other equipment installed in the rack 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the customer alarm monitoring facility Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 for connecting DC power to XDM or BG shelves 5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for connecting a high-power XDM, or a regular XDM or BG shelf
ALARM IN/OUT
6, 7, 8
Shelves DC input power Shelf DC input, high power
3-28
417006-2311-0H3-B00
RAP-BG
The RAP-BG is a power distribution panel for BG and XDM small shelves, installed in racks. The RAP-BG performs the following main functions:
Power distribution for up to four XDM-300 shelves, installed on the same rack. The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC or -60 VDC. Since XDM-300 shelves can use redundant power sources, the RAP-BG supports connection to two separate DC power circuits. Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the XDM-300 shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The maximum current that can be supplied to a shelf fed from the RAP-BG is 16A. The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-BG installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after opening the front cover of the RAP-BG. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-BG, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-9: RAP-BG front panel Table 3-17: RAP-BG front panel component functions No. Designation Function
SOURCE A
Translucent cover for the four circuit breakers (Shelf 1, Shelf 2, Shelf 3, Shelf 4 - one per BG/XDM shelf installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A. Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
SOURCE B
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-29
RAP-4B
The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for BG and XDM small shelves, installed in racks. The RAP-4B performs the following main functions:
Power distribution for up to four protected XDM 100 or BG Product Line shelves, installed on the same rack. The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC or 60 VDC. Since XDM 100 or BG Product Line shelves can use redundant power sources, the RAP-4B supports connection to two separate DC power circuits. Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the XDM 100 Product Line shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements. The CB rating installed in the RAP-4B for feeding a single shelf is 50 A maximum. The total power that can be provided by the RAP-4B is up to 3.2 kW maximum. The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To prevent accidental changing of a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after opening the front cover of the RAP-4B. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously. NOTE: BG shelves support only two alarm indications: Major and Minor. A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in XDM shelves connected to the RAP-4B. In case of BG shelves connected to the RAP-4B, the buzzer is activated whenever a Major alarm is present in the BG shelves.
Connection of alarms from up to four XDM or BG shelves, each shelf with maximum four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.
3-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-4B, and the table lists the functions of the front panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
Figure 3-10: RAP-4B front panel Table 3-18: RAP-4B front panel component functions No. Designation Function
SOURCE A
Four circuit breakers (designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4 one per XDM 100 Product Line or BG shelf installed in the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power source A. Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the RAP-4B. Pushbutton, pressing it activates the buzzer and turns the indicators on for test purposes. Green indicator, lights whenever at least one DC power source is connected to the RAP-4B. Red indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the RAP-4B is Critical. Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the RAP-4B is Major. Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an alarm in the shelves connected to the RAP-4B is Minor. Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
---
Buzzer (Concealed under cover) TEST POWER ON CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR SOURCE B
2 3 4 5 6 7
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-31
The RAP-4B alarm connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.
Figure 3-11: RAP-4B alarm connectors Table 3-19: RAP-4B connector functions No. Designation Function
1, 2, 3, 4
Shelf alarms
Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines to XDM or BG shelves and other equipment installed in the rack. 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines to the customer alarm monitoring facility.
ALARM IN/OUT
3-32
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm Connection Options

The xRAP product family supports power supply and alarms connection to the various types of XDM platforms. A mixture of big and small XDM platforms is possible in accordance with the platforms power consumption and the xRAP total power. All xRAPs support redundancy through connections to two separate power sources for each protected platform (i.e., two independent circuit breakers are provided on the xRAP for each connected platform). NOTE: The generic name xRAP is used when the text is
applicable for any one of the ECI Telecom xRAP units (PRAP, xRAP-D, xRAP-B, xRAP-HP, xRAP-100, or miniRAP).
The following table lists the characteristics of the available xRAPs:

Table 3-20: RAP features
Features miniRAP xRAP-100 PRAP xRAP-D xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)
Number of XDM platforms with redundant power support 3 (2 circuit breakers per platform 4) Total power consumption Severity alarms 6
1 + 35
1.2 KW Four alarms for one platform
3.2 KW Integrated, four alarms from four platforms (OR gate)
4.8 KW Two separated groups of four alarms each from one XDM-3000 One buzzer signal that reports on "Critical" alarms toward the user central monitor system
4.5 KW
4.5 KW
4 KW Integrated, four alarms from two platforms (OR gate)
Two separated groups of Two separated four alarms each from groups of four two platforms alarms each from two platforms
Separate buzzer signals
---
---
Two separate buzzer signals that report on "Critical" alarms toward the user central monitor system
Two separate buzzer signals that report on "Critical" alarms toward the user central monitor system
---
3 4
The number of supported shelves depends on their total power consumption. The same type of circuit breaker is used in all xRAP versions. The value of the circuit breaker is defined by the power consumption requirements of the shelf and not by the type of xRAP. 5 The 3pin connectors for three shelves (shelf#1, shelf#2, and shelf#3) can only be used for the lower power consumption shelves (XDM-40/50/100/200). The 5pin connectors for shelf#4 can be used either for the lower power consumption shelves or for the higher power consumption shelves (XDM-300/500/1000/2000). 6 Critical, Major, Warning, and Minor alarms toward the customer central monitoring system. 417006-2311-0H3-B00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-33

Features miniRAP xRAP-100 PRAP xRAP-D

xRAP-B (EOL) xRAP-HP (EOL)
Separate buzzer shut-off signals
---
---
One buzzer shut off signal that mutes the buzzer in the user central monitor system Total eight inputs to the XDM-3000
Two separate buzzer shut off signals that mute the buzzer in the user central monitor system
--Two separate buzzer shut off signals that mute the buzzer in the user central monitor system Fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs per xRAP-B Flexible 8, total eight inputs per xRAP-HP (up to Rev.C01) For Rev.C02, fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs Flexible 10, total eight outputs per xRAP-HP (up to Rev.C01) For Rev.C02, fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs Terminal lug
Number of input External alarms 7
---
Fixed, four inputs per platform, total 16 per xRAP-100
Fixed, four inputs per platform, total eight inputs per xRAP-D
Number of output External alarms 9
---
Fixed, two outputs per platform, total eight per xRAP-100
Total eight outputs from the XDM-3000
Fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs per xRAP-D
Fixed, four outputs per platform, total eight outputs per xRAP-B
Connector type 3 pin for power cable connector between xINF and xRAP (xRAP side) Cable size between 35 mm2 xRAP and (1+1) batteries (connects with terminal lugs)
3 pin and 5 pin 5 pin connector connector
5 pin connector
5 pin connector
35 mm2 (1+1)
25 mm2 (1+1), (1+1), & (1+1) Three inputs for side A and three inputs for side B
25 mm2 11 50 mm2 (1+1) & (1+1) (1+1) Two inputs for side A and two inputs for side B
50 mm2 (1+1)
NOTE: Beginning with V7.2, platform power supply
limitations are enforced by the management software. Upper bound limits for total platform power usage are defined through the management configuration variables. The upper bound limits are enforced through software protection. For more information, see the EMS-XDM User Manual.
7 8
External Alarms input via Opto coupler. Using dip switches. 9 External Alarms output via dry contacts. 10 Using dip switches. 11 Bridge option to work with a single 50mm2 power cable available. 3-34 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2311-0H3-B00
Equipment Installation
The following sections provide general instructions for the installation of the XDM-300 and auxiliary equipment. The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those described for installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes regarding live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures. The information appearing in these sections should be used in conjunction with specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from ECI Telecom Networks Solutions Divisions Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales representative. The XDM-300 shelf, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual.
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with the requirements listed in Site Preparation (on page 3-1). The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start/Safety Guidelines (on page 1-1) have been completed.
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on the rack rails using a soft pencil).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-35
Equipment Installation Sequence

Each component of the XDM-300 system is supplied separately and must be installed in the correct sequence, according to the site plan. The XDM-300 shelf can be mounted in the rack in an horizontal or vertical position. The main equipment used for both installations is similar, and differs in the number of accessories, type of brackets used in each position, and one accessory, used only for horizontal mountings. NOTE:
If you are not installing an FST for a particular XDM-300 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the rack in case optical modules are added to the shelf in the future. If you are not installing a TPU for a particular XDM-300 shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the rack so that the protection unit can be added in the future, if required, without interrupting operation.
CAUTION:
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer or a buffer plate must be installed between any such additional equipment and the XDM-300 shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer must be purchased from ECI Telecom. During the installation of equipment in the rack, make sure all the optical connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.
Several installation options are illustrated in Installation Options (on page 4-1).
3-36
417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 Horizontal Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence

A high-density installation of a horizontal XDM-300 shelf and corresponding accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table that follows.
Figure 3-12: Components of XDM-300 horizontal installation
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-37
Depending on the specific equipment being installed according to the site installation plan, the installation of an XDM-300 system comprises the general stages in the order of execution set out in the following table.
Table 3-21: Outline of XDM-300 horizontal installation sequence Step Procedure Section
1. 2. 3.
Install a rack (if required). Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including: xRAP-D, xRAP-100, RAP-BG, or RAP-4B Cable guides (two) Cable slack tray Fiber guides for ETSI A racks (two) FST (optional) ODF units (optional) Optical Patch Panel (OPP) Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable routing process. Install the XDM-300 shelf in the rack. Note: If your site installation plan includes TPU protection, the XDM-300 is supplied with the TPU already installed. If you need to connect a TPU unit to an existing XDM-300 shelf, see Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 Shelf (on page 5-27). Install the air filter. Install the common cards in the XDM-300 shelf, including: FCU300 ECU300/ECU300-F MXC300 with NVM flash card Install the modules in the XDM-300 shelf, including: Optical and electrical I/O modules (SIM, PIM) EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or SIM64_XFP) ACP100 control modules SFP transceivers in optical XDM-300 modules
Rack Installation (on page 3-44) Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-6) Installing Ancillary Units in Racks (on page 3-50)
4.
Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Racks (on page 4-7)
5. 6.
Installing the Air Filter Installing XDM-300 Cards (on page 5-1)
7.
Installing XDM-300 Modules
3-38
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Step
Procedure
Section
8.
Install cards and modules in the optional TPU, including: TC/TCF module Single-slot TPMs Double-slot TPMs Triple-slot TPMs Install blank covers where I/O modules, cards, and TPMs are not used.
Installing TPU Modules (on page 5-21)
9. 10.
Route and connect all cables and fibers for Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks (on page 6-1) ETSI A racks, including: Power and alarm cables Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers Electrical interface cables to electrical modules (includes installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel) Electrical traffic through the TPU Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM modules Timing cables Management cables In some cases, it may be necessary to Attaching TPUs/OCU to the connect a TPU unit to an existing XDM-300 XDM-300 Shelf (on page 5-27) shelf.
11.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-39
XDM-300 Vertical Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence

A high-density installation of a vertical XDM-300 shelf and corresponding accessories might include the equipment illustrated in the following figure. The different components are described alongside a number indicating the step in which the component is installed, and corresponding to the steps in the table that follows.
Figure 3-13: Components of XDM-300 vertical installation
3-40
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Table 3-22: Outline of XDM-300 vertical installation sequence Step Procedure Section
1. 2. 3.
Install a rack (if required). Unpack and perform a visual inspection. Install ancillary equipment in the rack, including: xRAP-B, xRAP-100, or xRAP Cable guide Fiber guide for ETSI A racks FST (optional) ODF units (optional) OPP (optional) Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable routing process. Prepare the XDM-300 shelf for vertical installation: Remove the horizontal installation brackets. Install vertical installation brackets.
Rack Installation (on page 3-44) Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-6) Installing Ancillary Units in Racks (on page 3-50)
4.
5.
Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Install the XDM-300 shelf in the rack. Note: If your site installation plan includes Racks (on page 4-7) TPU protection, the XDM-300 is supplied with the TPU already installed. If you need to connect a TPU unit to an existing XDM-300 shelf, see Installing a TPU on the XDM-300 Shelf. Install the air filter. Installing the Air Filter Install the common cards in the XDM-300 Installing XDM-300 Cards (on shelf, including: page 5-1) FCU300 ECU300/ECU300-F MXC300 with NVM flash card Install the modules in the XDM-300 shelf, Installing XDM-300 Modules including: (on page 5-12) Optical and electrical I/O modules (SIM, PIM) EISMB/MCSM/DIOM data modules Optical I/O cards (SIM16_4 or SIM64_XFP) ACP100 control modules SFP transceivers in optical XDM-300 modules
6. 7.
8.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-41
Step
Procedure
Section
9.
Install cards and modules in the optional TPU, including: TC/TCF module Single-slot TPMs Double-slot TPMs Triple-slot TPMs Install blank covers where I/O modules, cards, and TPMs are not used.
Installing TPU Modules
10. 11.
Route and connect all cables and fibers for Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks (on page 6-1) ETSI A racks, including: Power and alarm cables Optical fibers to optical modules transceivers Electrical interface cables to electrical modules (includes installation of the optional xDDF-21 channel patch panel) Electrical traffic through the TPU Data cables to EISMB/MCSM/DIOM modules Timing cables Management cables In some cases, it may be necessary to connect a TPU unit to an existing XDM-300 shelf. Installing a TPU on the XDM-300 Shelf
12.
Outline of Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of an XDM-300 shelf are listed below. Consult your site installation plans for specific details. 1. Prepare the installation site (see "Site Preparation" on page 3-1) and check physical location, environmental compliance, and availability of power sources. 2. Prepare power, alarm, and management cables at the installation site (see "Platform Installation" on page 4-1). 3. Prepare transmission cables at the installation site. 4. Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission cables to the intended XDM-300 equipment location (see "Platform Installation" on page 4-1). 5. If required, install the equipment racks (see "Rack Installation" on page 3-44).
3-42
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6. Mark the location of each XDM-300 shelf and relevant accessories Fiber Storage Tray (FST), patch panels, and Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) on each rack, in accordance with the site installation plan. NOTE: If you are currently installing an XDM-300 shelf without TPU protection, you may want to leave sufficient space above/under the shelf to enable the addition of the TPU/TPUs at a later stage. 7. When applicable, install the EMS-XDM management station (see the EMS-XDM User Manual). 8. Install the power distribution and alarm panels xRAP-D (on page 3-19), or xRAP-100 (on page 3-26), and other equipment needed in each rack. 9. Install the XDM-300 shelves in the appropriate rack. 10. For each XDM-300 shelf where optical modules are used, install an FST above the XDM-300 shelf and route the optical fibers to the FST (see "Installing the FST" on page 3-89). NOTE: Even if you are not currently installing an FST, it is
recommended that you leave enough space above the XDM-300 shelf to enable future installation, in case optical modules are added to the shelf at a later stage.
11. Install the ECU300/ECU300-F, FCU300, MXC300, and I/O cards in the shelf (see "Installing XDM-300 Cards" on page 5-1). 12. Install the prescribed I/O modules in the shelf. 13. If applicable, install the TC card and the prescribed TPMs in the TPU. 14. Depending on the modules in your XDM-300 shelf:

Route the optical fibers from the FST to the relevant module connectors. Route the E1 electrical cables to the patch panel location. Route the data cables to the data modules (EISMB/DIOM/MCSM). Install a patch panel for each XDM-300 shelf where electrical E1 modules are used and 120 /75 conversion is required. You will need a separate patch panel for each PIM2_21 module in the shelf. NOTE: The patch panel can be installed on the same rack
above the XDM-300 shelf or on a different rack.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-43
Connect coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the electrical I/O modules if you are not using a TPU, or for modules which are not protected. Connect both the electrical I/O modules and the coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the TPU if you are using a TPU.
Refer to the relevant section for the rack type in use (ETSI A). 15. Connect control cables between ACP100 modules, ECU300/ECU300-F, and management station. 16. Connect management cables between the equipment installed in the rack and the management station. 17. Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the RAP panels to each XDM-300 installed in the rack, as described in Connecting Power Cables (on page 6-3) and Connecting Alarm Cables (on page 6-4). NOTE: In some cases, you may need to add a TPU after the
XDM-300 has already been installed. Instructions for this procedure are provided in Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 shelf (on page 5-27).
Rack Installation
Installing Equipment Racks
NOTE: The instructions in this section are relevant to the
installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended that XDM-300 shelves be installed in ETSI A racks.
Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing the rack. Before you start: Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack. If you have not yet unpacked the rack and the associated mounting kits, do so now (see Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection (on page 3-6)).
3-44
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To mark out the rack floor plan: 1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A racks: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page 3-46). 23 in. rack: Use template of diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page 3-47). 19 in. rack: Use template of diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page 3-47).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks. 2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also mark out all cable entry slots. 3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for equipment bolting.
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors

This section describes how to install racks on concrete floors. To mount the rack on a concrete floor: 1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate template (diagram a. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page 3-46) diagram a. or b. of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page 3-47)). 2. Insert expansion shields into the holes. 3. Position the rack over the mounting holes. 4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in accordance with diagram b. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks, or diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for 19 in. and 23 in. racks.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-45
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors

This section describes how to install racks on wooden floors. To mount the rack on a wooden floor: 1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate template (see the following figures), using a 5-mm drill bit. 2. Position the rack over the mounting holes. 3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see the following figures).
Figure 3-14: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks
3-46
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 3-15: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended) Floors

This section describes how to install racks on floating (suspended) floors. To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor: 1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor in accordance with the appropriate template. 2. Position the rack over the mounting holes. 3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c. of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page 3-46).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-47
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly

This section describes how to install racks on a suspended overhead tray. To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray: 1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram (see the following figure) and position the overhead rack securing brackets. 2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets. 2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks are generally attached only to the ceiling.
Figure 3-16: Rack mounting diagram for attachment to suspended overhead tray (2200 mm rack)
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the rack using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom. In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before installing the equipment.
Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar. Use a grounding lead that meets the Rack grounding requirements listed in section Before You Start.
3-48
417006-2311-0H3-B00
19 in. Rack Installation

The XDM-300 can also be installed in European 19 in. racks. This is accepted under the limitations that the rack's general dimensions are according to the following figure. Any other European 19 in. rack must first be examined and approved by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division Mechanical Department.
Figure 3-17: Example of an approved European 19" rack
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-49
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks

ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient installation of equipment in racks. Contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard items or additional items. This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The specific units you will need to install depend on your site installation plan, and may include one or more of the following:
RAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack:
xRAP-D Installing the xRAP-D (on page 3-51), for connection of up to two XDM-300 shelves on the same rack xRAP-100 Installing the xRAP-100 (on page 3-65), for connection of up to one XDM-300 shelf, and three XDM smaller shelves (like XDM-100 and XDM-50) on the same rack RAP-BG Installing the RAP-BG (on page 3-72), for connection of one XDM-300 shelf on the same rack RAP-4B Installing the RAP-4B (on page 3-79), for connection of one XDM-300 shelf on the same rack
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks (on page 3-87) FST located above the XDM-300 shelf accessories, recommended for installations with a large number of optical modules Installing the FST (on page 3-89) ODF units Installing the ODF (on page 3-91) OPP Installing the OPP (on page 3-94)
In addition, you may need to install an xDDF-21 patch panel where PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B or PIM2_63S are used, and where conversion between balanced 120 and unbalanced 75 interfaces is required. The xDDF-21 patch panel can be installed in the same rack above the XDM-300 shelf, or in a different rack with a longer SCSI cable running from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B (or VHDCI cable for a PIM2_63S) in the XDM-300 shelf to the patch panel. Installation of the xDDF-21 patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic cable connection procedure described in Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules (on page 6-6). In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
3-50
417006-2311-0H3-B00
CAUTION: If additional equipment other than XDM-300
shelves is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed between any such additional equipment and the XDM-300 shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. Consult your ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact heat buffer required.
Installing the xRAP-D

NOTE: Skip this section if the xRAP-D is not used.
Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 3-11). The installation of an xRAP-D unit includes the following steps: 1. Prepare DC power cables. 2. Install the xRAP-D in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or on the extendable installation rails. 3. Ground the xRAP-D to the rack grounding stud. 4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D. Depending on the site power requirements, one of the following cable connections options should be chosen: a. In most configurations, either one or two standard (25mm2) input power cables are connected to each side of the xRAP-D unit. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on page 3-55). b. Alternatively, a single power input cable may be connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component. 5. Attach protective covers to the sides and bottom of the xRAP-D unit. (From V7.15 only, required for NEBS; optional for all others.) 6. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-300 shelves to the xRAP-D. 7. Install circuit breakers. 8. Check DC voltage polarity. 9. Connect the alarm cables. For a description of the xRAP-D, refer to the XDM-100 or XDM-1000 Product Line Reference Manual.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-51
Preparing DC Input Power Cables

The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the xRAP-D source A and source B inputs. When working with the xRAP-D, four sets of cables are typically required, two for each source. NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.
Before you start: In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power cables connected, the xRAP-D works with a full set of input power cables and backup power cables. This option, illustrated in the following figure, is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on page 3-55).
3-52
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Another power configuration option supported by the xRAP-D enables use of a single power input cable to support either one or two XDM platforms. The single power cable is connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. Two variations of this option are illustrated in the following figure. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
Figure 3-19: xRAP-D power supply with bridge, two variations
NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source. This supplies enough power to support a single XDM platform with 2250 W, or two XDM platforms where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. In many cases, this configuration is sufficient.
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all input power cables from all power sources to the xRAP-D unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second XDM platform, if the network configuration is ever changed.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-53
Each input power cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 25 (or 50) mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment. If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs. To prepare a DC power cable: 1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket. 2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve. 3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die, or equivalent. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead. 5. Repeat these steps for each DC power cable being used. To install the xRAP-D:
Attach the xRAP-D to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the xRAP-D: 1. The xRAP-D grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the following figure of the xRAP-D to identify the grounding stud. 2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements (on page 1-8). 3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-D grounding stud using a spring washer and nut. 4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding stud.
Figure 3-20: Location of xRAP-D grounding stud
3-54
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D

In the xRAP-D, two 25 mm2 power cables are typically used for each power source. When working in the recommended redundant mode with all power cables connected, the xRAP-D works with four sets of input power cables. This typical configuration option is described in this section.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-55
NOTE: When necessary, the xRAP-D is able to work with only a single 25 mm2 power cable from each power source. This supplies enough power to support a single XDM platform with 2250 W, or two XDM platforms where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1100 W for per platform. In many cases, this configuration is sufficient. The instructions in this section apply to this configuration option also. (This configuration option is only available from V7.2, when the management software enforces limitations on maximum power consumption.)
However, it is recommended, if at all possible, to connect all input power cables from the power sources to the xRAP-D unit upon the initial system installation. Connecting all cables from the beginning is an easy step that greatly simplifies any later system upgrades, since the power cables are already in place and ready to supply power to a second XDM platform, if the network configuration is ever changed. Alternatively, a single power input cable supporting two XDM platforms may be connected to the xRAP-D using a bridge component. This option is described in Connecting DC Input Power Cable to the xRAP-D with a Bridge Component.
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-D: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-D by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-22: Identification of xRAP-D cable routes
3-56
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover and remove the cover. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side (main); the same board is used at the source B side (protection). Note that there are two complete sets of power terminals and circuit breakers on each side. Separate input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through the two sets of input power terminals into the two circuit breakers on the source A side, supplying independent power sources for up to two XDM shelves. Each circuit breaker feeds into a separate power output connection for the power cable that connects to the XDM platform. Similarly, separate input power cables from the user's input power supply feed through separate input terminals into the two circuit breakers on the source B side, and from the circuit breakers feed into the additional power output connections that provide an optional protective backup power supply for up to two XDM shelves.
Figure 3-23: Connecting DC power cables
The preceding figure portrays the electrical connections on the left side of the xRAP-D, the side that connects to the user's main power supply for the XDM shelves being powered. The right side of the xRAP-D contains a mirror image of the connections illustrated in the preceding figure. The right side connects to the user's (optional) backup protective power supply for the shelves.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-57
identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-D power terminal board.
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to
3. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-D opening. 4. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminals, marked (+) on the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of positive terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables. 5. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm. 6. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board. Note that the xRAP-D works with two sets of negative terminals, used with two 25 mm2 power cables. 7. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug. 8. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B. 9. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D (see To ground the xRAP-D (on page 3-54)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
3-58
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Attaching Protective Covers

From V7.15 only, as required for NEBS. Optional for all others. To attach protective covers on the xRAP-D: 1. From the open back end, look at the inside panel of the xRAP-D unit. Find the four screws in the left and right sides of the power panel. The two screws on the left side are highlighted in the following figure.
Figure 3-24: Side screws highlighted on left side of xRAP-D unit
2. Find the replacement spacer screws included in the protective cover kit. Note that four replacement spacer screws are included with the xRAP-D. A replacement spacer screw is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-25: Replacement spacer screw
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-59
3. Replace the side screws with the replacement spacer screws. The following figure illustrates the inside of the xRAP-D unit, highlighting the left side replacement spacer screws in place.
Figure 3-26: Replacement spacer screws in place in xRAP-D unit
4. Find the small L-shaped protective covers included in the kit. Four protective covers are included for the xRAP-D. The protective covers are illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-27: Protection cover for xRAP-D
3-60
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5. Place the protective covers into the xRAP-D, two covers on each side. For each protective cover, the smaller hole fits onto the top of the spacer screw on one side and the two larger holes are anchored on top of the two terminals above the spacer screw. The jutting-out edge of the protective cover fits into the opening on the edge of the xRAP next to the terminals. The following figure illustrates protective covers inserted into the xRAP-D unit.
Figure 3-28: xRAP-D protective covers in place
6. Secure the protective covers in place by screwing on the wing nuts supplied in the kit onto the tops of the spacer screws on each side. 7. Find the protective bottom panel in the kit. The bottom panel for the xRAP-D is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-29: Bottom panel for xRAP-D
8. Secure the bottom panel into place with the four screws supplied in the kit.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-61
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM-300 platform: 1. Before starting, identify the platform power connectors on the xRAP-D board in accordance with the following figure.
Figure 3-30: xRAP-D connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 5-pin D-type male connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to connector Shelf 1 (see preceding figure). 3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector. 4. If you are connecting an additional platform to the xRAP-D, repeat the above steps for the second platform. Note that a maximum of 55A is supplied from the power sources to each XDM platform. Power is supplied independently to each XDM platform connected to the xRAP unit. Power is not shared between XDM platforms. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the shelves to source B. 6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see To ground the xRAP-D (on page 3-54)). 7. Route each platform power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding platform position, and securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function. NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after
completing the installation of the shelves and all other components.
3-62
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install the xRAP-D circuit breakers: 1. If the xRAP-D front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-31: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered platform configuration. 3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the xRAP-D source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure. 4. If an additional platform is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding platform position of the power terminal board. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B circuit breakers.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-63
To check the DC voltage polarity: 1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-D. 2. Set all xRAP-D circuit breakers to ON. 3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative pins of each power cable. CAUTION: Pay attention not to short-circuit the multimeter leads when checking the voltage. NOTE: The power cable terminates with a 3-pin (3W3), or a 5-pin (5W5) connector in accordance with the connected XDM shelf. For a 3W3 connector the positive pin is A3 and the negative pin A2; for a 5W5 connector the positive pins are A4, A5, and the negative pins A2, A3. 4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC) and that it has the correct polarity. 5. Return all xRAP-D circuit breakers to OFF. 6. Disconnect the xRAP-D input power sources. 7. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws. During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the connectors in Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D (on page 3-55). To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-D: 1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables. 2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. 3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended for Shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-D. 4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-D (see the figure in To ground the xRAP-D (on page 3-54)), and attach them to the bracket with cable ties. 5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding platform position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its function. 6. If an additional platform is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the cables serving the additional platform. Make sure to attach identification tags to each cable end.
3-64
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing the xRAP-100

Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables (on page 3-11). The installation of an xRAP-100 unit includes the following steps: 1. Prepare DC power cables. 2. Install the xRAP-100 in the prescribed location, either at the top of the rack or on the extendable installation rails. 3. Ground the xRAP-100 to the rack grounding stud. 4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100. 5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-300 shelves to the xRAP-100. 6. Install circuit breakers. 7. Check DC voltage polarity. 8. Connect the alarm cables. For a description of the xRAP-100, refer to the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual. The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the xRAP-100 source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) should be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.
Before you start: Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 35 mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment. If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-65
To prepare a DC power cable: 1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket. 2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve. 3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die, or equivalent. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead. To install the xRAP-100:
Attach the xRAP-100 to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the xRAP-100: 1. The xRAP-100 grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the following figure to identify it. 2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements (on page 1-8). 3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-100 grounding stud using a spring washer and nut. 4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding stud.
Figure 3-32: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud
3-66
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the xRAP-100 by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-33: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and remove the cover.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-67
3. Identify the various terminals located on the xRAP-100 board in accordance with the following figure. This figure shows the terminals at the source A side; the same terminals are used at the source B side.
Figure 3-34: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100

identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-100 board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate xRAP-100 opening. 5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board. 6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 450 N cm to 550 N cm. 7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board. 8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug. 9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B. 10. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (on page 3-66)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM-300 shelf: 1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-100 board in accordance with the following figure.
Figure 3-35: Identification of xRAP-100 connectors
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type male connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to connector Shelf 1 (see the above figure). NOTE: The cables leading to connectors Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and
Shelf 3 can only be connected with a 3-pin D-type connector (for regular shelves :XDM-50, XDM-100, XDM-500, or XDM-40). If a regular shelf has to be connected to the 5-pin, D-type connector, use an adapter cable with a 5-pin D-type connector on the xRAP-100 side and a 3-pin D-type connector on the shelf side.
XDM-2000) has to be connected to the xRAP-100 it can be connected only to the 5-pin D-type connector (Shelf 4), using a 5-pin D-type to 5-pin D-type adapter cable.
NOTE: If a high power shelf (XDM-300, XDM-1000, or
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector. 4. If you are connecting additional shelves to the xRAP-100, repeat the above steps for each shelf. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the shelves to source B.
417006-2311-0H3-B00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 3-69
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100, and attach them to the retainers with cable ties (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (on page 3-66)). 7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function. NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after
completing the installation of the shelves and all other components.
Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers

To install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers: 1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-36: Installation of xRAP-100 circuit breakers
3-70
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration. The recommended circuit breakers according to the XDM-300 shelf configuration are listed in the following table. 3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the xRAP-100 board corresponding to source A, as shown in the previous figure. 4. If more than one shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding sockets on the board. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B circuit breakers.
Table 3-23: XDM-300 recommended circuit breakers Shelf type Maximum power dissipation Recommended CB per shelf
XDM-300 basic shelf XDM-300 with TPU XDM-300 with two TPUs XDM-300 with two TPUs and one OCU
950 W/3241 BTU/hr 35A 1000 W/3412 BTU/hr 1050 W/3583 BTU/hr 1100 W/3753 BTU/hr 35A 35A 35A
To check the DC voltage polarity: 1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-100. 2. Set all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to ON. 3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive (pin A3) and negative (pin A2) pins of each power cable. 4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity. 5. Return all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to OFF. 6. Disconnect the xRAP-100 input power sources. 7. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-71
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP-100: Use Identification of xRAP-100 connectors (on page 3-69) to identify the xRAP-100 connector functions. 1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables. 2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable to the ALARMS connector, and then securely attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. 3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended for shelf 1 to the Shelf 1 connector on the xRAP-100. 4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (on page 3-66)), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties. 5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its function. 6. If an additional shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the cables serving the additional shelf. Make sure to attach identification tags to each cable end.
Installing the RAP-BG

Before You Start: Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables. For a description of the RAP-BG, refer to the XDM Product Line Reference Manual. To install the RAP-BG: 1. Prepare DC power cables. 2. Install the RAP-BG in the prescribed location. 3. Ground the RAP-BG to the rack grounding stud. 4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-BG. 5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM shelves to the RAP-BG. 6. Install circuit breakers. 7. Check power wiring.
3-72
417006-2311-0H3-B00

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence. The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-BG source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment. NOTE: When the RAP-BG provides power to a single XDM shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements. CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at
the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable: 1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket. 2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve. 3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die, or equivalent. It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-73
Installing the RAP-BG

The RAP-BG is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack. To install the RAP-BG:
Attach the RAP-BG to the side rails and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-BG: 1. The RAP-BG grounding stud is located on its rear cover. Use the following figure to identify it.
Figure 3-37: Location of RAP-BG grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements. 3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-BG grounding stud, using a spring washer and nut. 4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding stud. To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-BG: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-BG by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-38: Identification of RAP-BG cable routes
3-74
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover and remove the cover. 3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side; a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-39: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-BG power terminal board.
4. Bring the two leads of DC source A input power cable to the appropriate RAP-BG opening. 5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure). 6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm. 7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure). 8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug. 9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B. 10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties. During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-BG DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-BG (on page 3-75).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-75
To connect the DC power cables to a shelf: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-BG. 2. Insert the DC power cable end, terminated with lugs, of the XDM-300 shelf through the opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If more shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable. 3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board. 4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm. 5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board. 6. Repeat Step 4 for the black lead lug. 7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of the RAP-BG according to the following figure.
Figure 3-40: RAP-BG shelf power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the ground stud terminal located on the RAP-BG side panel. 9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug. 10. If more XDM-300 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each shelf power cable. 11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the shelves to source B. 12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.
3-76
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install the RAP-BG circuit breakers: 1. If the RAP-BG front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-BG front cover to the RAP-BG chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-41: RAP-BG front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).
Figure 3-42: RAP-BG circuit breakers installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the RAP-BG source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure. 4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power terminal board. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source B circuit breakers.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-77
To check DC voltage polarity: 1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see Grounding Requirements). 2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-BG. 3. Set all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to ON. 4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts of each power cable. The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the XDM-300 shelf, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-43: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity. 6. Return all the RAP-BG circuit breakers to OFF. 7. Disconnect the RAP-BG input power sources. 8. Reinstall the RAP-BG front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.
3-78
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing the RAP-4B

Before You Start: Before connecting DC power cables, refer to DC Power Cables. For a description of the RAP-4B, refer to the XDM Product Line Reference Manual. To install the RAP-4B: 1. Prepare DC power cables. 2. Install the RAP-4B in the prescribed location. 3. Ground the RAP-4B to the rack grounding stud. 4. Connect input DC power cables to the RAP-4B. 5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM shelves to the RAP-4B. 6. Install circuit breakers. 7. Check power wiring.

NOTE: According to accepted industry standards for
connecting DC power, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a red cable, and the negative lead (-48 V) with a black cable. However, according to the BS7671 (GB) and HD 308 S2:2001 (EU) standards, the positive lead (+48 V) must be connected with a blue cable and the negative lead (-48 V) with a gray cable. In the following sections that describe DC power cable connections, use cables with appropriate colors to comply with the standards in your area of residence.
The DC input power cables connect the two DC power sources and the RAP-4B source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each source. Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 50 mm2 (.078 in.2), one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment. NOTE: When the RAP-4B provides power to a single
BroadGate shelf, lower gauge cables may be used. Refer to DC Power Cables for DC power cable requirements.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-79
CAUTION: If appropriate leads have already been prepared at

the prescribed rack location, make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable: 1. Strip about 22 mm (1 in.) of the red lead jacket. 2. Insert all lead strands into the lug sleeve. 3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720 crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die, or equivalent. It is recommended to use insulation tape (of the same color as the lead jacket) between the cable lug and the cable itself. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 above for the black lead.
Installing the RAP-4B

The RAP-4B is attached to the rack side rails at the top position of the rack. To install the RAP-4B:
Attach the RAP-4B to the side rails and secure it with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.
To ground the RAP-4B: 1. The RAP-4B grounding stud is located on its rear cover. Use the following figure to identify it.
Figure 3-44: Location of RAP-4B grounding stud
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements described in Grounding Requirements. 3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the RAP-4B grounding stud, using a spring washer and nut. 4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack grounding stud.
To connect DC input power cables to the RAP-4B: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B by referring to the following figure.
Figure 3-45: Identification of RAP-4B cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover and remove the cover. 3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board by referring to the following figure (showing the terminals at source A side; a similar board is used at source B side).
Figure 3-46: Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B

identify the terminal polarity on the RAP-4B power terminal board.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-81
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source A input power cable to the appropriate RAP-4B opening. 5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure). 6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 1450 N cm to 1600 N cm. 7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on the power terminal board (see the previous figure). 8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug. 9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for source B. 10. Securely attach the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties. During the following procedure, refer to the figures illustrating the RAP-4B DC connections in Connecting DC power cables to the RAP-4B (on page 3-81). To connect the DC power cable to a shelf: 1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the RAP-4B. 2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of the XDM-300 shelf through the opening for shelf power cables connecting to source A. If more shelves are installed in the rack, start by connecting the Shelf 1 cable. 3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board. 4. Secure the lug using a flat washer, spring washer, and nut. Tighten the nut with a torque of 320 N cm to 350 N cm. 5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of Shelf 1 on the power terminal board. 6. Repeat Step 4 for the black lead lug.
3-82
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7. Identify the shelves grounding terminals located on the inner side panel of the RAP-4B according to the following figure.
Figure 3-47: RAP-4B shelf power cable grounding screws
8. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the ground stud terminal located on the RAP-4B side panel. 9. Repeat Step 4 for the grounding lead lug. 10. If more XDM-300 shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 9 for each shelf power cable. 11. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 10 to connect the shelves to source B. 12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in accordance with its function.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-83
To install the RAP-4B circuit breakers: 1. If the RAP-4B front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws fastening the RAP-4B front cover to the RAP-4B chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure).
Figure 3-48: RAP-4B front cover removal
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to power circuit A of shelf 1 (the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment; its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration).
Figure 3-49: RAP-4B circuit breakers installation
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the RAP-4B source A power terminal board, as shown in the previous figure. 4. If more shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the circuit breakers into the corresponding shelf positions of the power terminal board. 5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 4 above for source B circuit breakers.
3-84
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To Check DC Voltage Polarity

To check DC voltage polarity: 1. Make sure the correct site grounding test has been passed successfully (see Grounding Requirements). 2. Connect the DC input power to the RAP-4B. 3. Set all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to ON. 4. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive and negative contacts of each power cable. The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector contacts assembled on the cable end connected to the XDM-300 shelf, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-50: Shelf DC input power connector pin functions
5. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 VDC to -57.6 VDC), and that it has the correct polarity. 6. Return all the RAP-4B circuit breakers to OFF. 7. Disconnect the RAP-4B input power sources. 8. Reinstall the RAP-4B front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-85
Installing the Cable Guide

The number of cable guides required for horizontal XDM-300 shelf installations depends on whether electrical traffic modules are used in the upper module cage. One cable guide should be installed one hole under the XDM-300, to help neatly route control, timing, and management cables connected to the ECU300/ECU300-F card and traffic cables connected to electrical traffic modules in the lower module cage. If electrical traffic modules are installed in the upper module cage, an additional cable guide should be installed one installation hole above the shelf. One cable guide should be installed above the XDM-300 shelf in vertical installations. The cable guide is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 racks and the other for ETSI racks. To attach the rack mount brackets to the cable guide:
Attach each bracket to the corresponding cable guide sidewall with the four screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-51: Cable guide
To install the cable guide in the rack:
Install the cable guide in the prescribed location in the rack, and fasten it to the side rails of the rack with four screws.
3-86
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks

The fiber guide for ETSI A racks should be installed one mounting hole above the cable guide in the rack. To attach the rack mount brackets to the fiber guide:
Attach each bracket to the corresponding fiber guide sidewall with the four screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-52: Fiber guide
To install the fiber guide in the rack:
Install the cable guide in the rack one mounting hole above the cable guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.
Installing the Cable Slack Tray

The cable slack tray is installed only in horizontal XDM-300 shelf installations that also have a lower cable guide installed; these usually also include a fiber guide.
Figure 3-53: Cable slack tray
To install the cable slack tray in the rack:
Install the cable slack tray in the rack one mounting hole under the cable guide and fasten it to the rack side rails with two M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-87
Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable Box Tray

The PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray is available in two options for installation above or below the XDM-300 shelf. In installations in which the PIM2_63S are installed in both the upper and lower I/O module cage the two types must be installed. The tray is supplied by default with reversible brackets for installation in ETSI or 19" racks. If installation in 23" racks is required make sure to order the appropriate bracket kit.
Figure 3-54: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for above shelf installations
Figure 3-55: PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray for under shelf installations
3-88
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray:
Install the PIM2_63S traffic cable box tray in the rack one mounting hole above/under the XDM-300 shelf (according to the location of the PIM2-63S) and fasten it to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
Installing the FST

The FST should be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide. If additional equipment is installed above the FST, like another XDM-300 shelf, an additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such equipment. To install the FST in the rack: 1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts. 2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber, refer to the safety information in Work and Equipment Safety. 3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables. 4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack. 5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull the FST towards you to open it. NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it fully so that you can thread the fibers.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-89
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-56: Threading optical fibers in the FST
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector. 8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click. CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm. Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission characteristics.
3-90
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing the ODF

Identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack before performing the following procedures. The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 in. and ETSI racks, and the other for 23 in. 7 ft. racks. The 19 in./ETSI rack mount brackets can be used for both ETSI and 19 in. racks. To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF: 1. Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount brackets. 2. Attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with three screws, as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-57: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-91
To connect optical fibers to the ODF: 1. Push the release button on the ODF front panel to the left to release the latch and pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-58: ODF front panel
Figure 3-59: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF components. 3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the ODF splice support.
3-92
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-60: ODF fiber routes
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides to the splice support area. 6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber. 7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail, and slide the splicing sleeve over the splice. 8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support. NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,
first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step 3. 10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit. 11. Close the ODF front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit. 12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets (on page 3-91) and secure the user fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF. CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the
cable ties.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-93
To install ODF units in a rack:
Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the rack side rails with four screws.
Installing the OPP

The OPP can be installed in the same rack as the XDM-300 or in other racks according to the site installation requirements. To mount the OPP in the rack: 1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts. 2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber, follow the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment Safety. 3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables. 4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack. 5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull the OPP towards you to open it. NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP (on page 3-95). NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside
the OPP, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connector panel (on page 3-95). 8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. 9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector. 10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.
3-94
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Caution: Make sure that all the optical connectors are closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector, and immediately install a protective cap after a cable is disconnected. The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 1.4 in. (35 mm). Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission characteristics.
Figure 3-61: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3-95
3-96
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4
Platform Installation
In this chapter:
Installation Options.......................................................................................... 4-1 Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Racks .......................................................... 4-7 Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf ..................................................................... 4-26
Installation Options
XDM-300 shelves can be installed in ETSI A racks, 19" 600 mm deep racks (in consultation with and approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical Department), and in ANSI 19" racks. These racks can be installed on wooden, concrete, or suspended floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. The XDM-300 can be installed in the racks in an horizontal or vertical position. In addition, the XDM-300 can be expanded with one or two TPUs and an OCU. Different brackets and mechanical adapters are available for attaching the XDM-300 to the rack in each of these positions. NOTE: By default the XDM-300 comes with brackets for
horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. For vertical installation you must remove these brackets, and attach vertical brackets, supplied with the installation kit.
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation requirements. The following sections describe the installation options of the XDM-300.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-1
Layout of XDM-300 Horizontal Installation in ETSI A Racks

The XDM-300 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, cable guides for low-order and high-order traffic cables, fiber guides, cable slack tray for cables in the lower section of the XDM-300, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel, according to the rack installation plan. Typical installations of the XDM-300 in a horizontal position are shown in the following figures.
Figure 4-1: Typical XDM-300 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack
4-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 4-2: Typical horizontal installation of two XDM-300 shelves in an ETSI A rack
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-3
Figure 4-3: Typical horizontal installation of three basic XDM-300 shelves in 2200 mm ETSI A rack
4-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 4-4: Typical horizontal installation of three XDM-300 shelves with TPUs in 2600 mm ETSI A rack
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-5
Layout of XDM-300 Vertical Installation in ETSI A Racks

The XDM-300 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack may include, in addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as RAP, a cable guides for low-order and high-order traffic cables, a fiber guide, FST, and xDDF-21 patch panel, according to the rack installation plan. A typical installation of the XDM-300 in a vertical position is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-5: Typical XDM-300 vertical installation in an ETSI A rack
4-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Racks

The XDM-300 can be installed in the following rack types:
ECI Telecom's recommended ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm - hereafter referred to as ETSI A), which provides the following benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient maintenance of all rack cables, including:

E1 cables Control cables Power cables Data cables Timing cables
Two ducts on the racks front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension floors and/or ceiling ladders Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see Environmental Requirements (on page 3-2)) Front door for left or right opening mounting
19" 600 mm deep rack (in consultation with and approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical Department) 19" ANSI rack (in consultation with and approved by ECI Telecom's Mechanical Department)
XDM-300 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. For information on the various mounting options, see Rack Installation (on page 3-44). By default, XDM-300 shelves are supplied with brackets for horizontal installation in ETSI A racks. The shelves come empty with no cards or modules installed. Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:
Attaching the XDM-300 shelf to a rack. The shelf can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position. Grounding the XDM-300 shelf.
The installation of the XDM-300 shelf in the vertical position requires a workaround which is described in Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in the Vertical Position (on page 4-14).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-7
After these procedures have been completed, the XDM-300 shelf is ready for the installation of:
ECU300/ECU300-F, MXC300, and FCU300 cards, as described in Installing XDM-300 Cards (on page 5-1). I/O modules, as described in Installing XDM-300 Modules. TPMs in the optional TPU, as described in Installing TPU Modules.
Environmental Considerations
Observe the following guidelines when installing the XDM-300 in racks: 1. Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times. 2. XDM-300 shelves can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks. When installed in a closed rack, the door must be perforated. An example of a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI A rack shown in the following figure. 3. Always install the first XDM-300 platform in the lower part of the rack, leaving a space of at least 1U from the bottom of the rack. 4. In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always install the equipment with the horizontal airflow in the lower part of the rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow above it. 5. Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the XDM-300 and the next platform. 6. Leave as much space as possible between the racks cable supports and the XDM-300 sidewalls.
4-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7. Always consider the platform airflow requirements when organizing the cable and fiber routes near the XDM-300 sidewalls.
Figure 4-6: ETSI A rack closed view
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-9
Typical XDM-300 Installation

In addition to the XDM-300 shelf itself, the equipment installed in the rack includes:
One Rack Alarm Panel (RAP) installed at the top of the rack, used to connect external power and alarm monitoring lines to the XDM-300 shelves installed in the rack. One of the following is suitable:

xRAP-D - fully supports up to two XDM-300 shelves xRAP-100 - fully supports one XDM-300 shelf and three XDM smaller shelves (like XDM-100 and XDM-50) RAP-BG - supports one XDM-300 shelf RAP-4B - supports one XDM-300 shelf
In addition to the space needed for installing the RAP, you must leave at least 50 mm free space under it for routing cables.
Fiber Storage Tray (FST). A separate FST can be installed above each XDM-300 with optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm free space between the XDM-300 cabling accessories and its FST, and another 50 mm free between the FST and the next XDM-300 shelf. Cable guide. Two units should be installed, one just above the XDM-300 and one under it, to help neatly route the cables connected to the shelf. Two fiber guides, installed one above the upper cable guide and one under the lower cable guide. Helps to neatly route fibers, while keeping the minimum allowed bend radius. Cable slack tray. One unit should be installed under the lower fiber guide, to help organize the slacks of cables connected to the lower module cage and lower TPU. xDDF-21 (optional). A separate xDDF-21 panel can be used when unbalanced 75 interfaces need to be connected and converted to balanced 120 interfaces of PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM2_63S modules. Leave at least 100 mm free space above the XDM-300 shelf and below the xDDF-21. NOTE: If not otherwise specified XDM-300 shelf installations
in racks shown in this manual refer to 2200 mm ETSI A racks.
4-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 4-7: Typical XDM-300 horizontal installation in an ETSI A rack
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-11
Integrating XDM-300 Shelves and Other Equipment in One Rack

XDM-300 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack. Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided that any heat generated by additional equipment can efficiently be dissipated, and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units installed in the same rack. In the event of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team for assistance.
Figure 4-8: Typical installation of XDM-300 and XDM-100 shelves in an ETSI A rack
4-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 4-9: Typical installation of XDM-300 and XDM-1000 shelves in an ETSI A rack
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-13
Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in the Horizontal Position

The XDM-300 shelf comes with brackets ready for installation in ETSI A racks in the horizontal position. To install an XDM-300 shelf in the horizontal position in an ETSI A rack: 1. Identify the prescribed position of the XDM-300 shelf in the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan. 2. Place the XDM-300 shelf in the prescribed position using the two stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts. 3. If required, based on the site installation plan, see Installing the FST (on page 3-89) for instructions on installing an FST above the XDM-300 accessories.
Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in the Vertical Position

Before installing the XDM-300 shelf (in the vertical position), in an ETSI A rack, you must prepare it by performing the following steps:

Remove the horizontal installation brackets. Install the lower vertical bracket. Attach the vertical filter housing. Install the upper vertical bracket. Insert the vertical air filter.
The components required for the vertical installation are supplied in the installation kit. The procedures required for preparing the XDM-300 for vertical installation follow. CAUTION: When installing an XDM-300 shelf vertically, pay
attention to position the shelf with the FCU300 facing downwards. This is important to ensure proper ventilation of the XDM-300 shelf.
4-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To remove the XDM-300 shelf horizontal brackets: 1. Place the XDM-300 shelf on a flat clean surface. 2. Remove the four screws fastening the horizontal bracket to the right side of the shelf. 3. Repeat step 2 for the bracket on the left side of the shelf. NOTE: The sides of the XDM-300 shelf described hereafter refer to the product installed in the vertical position. For example, the lower (or bottom) side of the shelf is the side near the FCU300. To install the vertical lower bracket: 1. Orient the XDM-300 shelf on a flat clean surface upside down. 2. Place the vertical lower bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-15
3. Identify the two long screws and nine short screws according to the following figure.
Figure 4-10: Installing the vertical lower bracket
4. Fasten the lower bracket to the shelf with two long screws and nine short screws from the installation kit.
4-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To prepare the filter frame assembly: 1. Identify the filter frame assembly parts according to the following figure.
Figure 4-11: Preparing the filter frame assembly
2. Insert the filter frame pin guides into the corresponding holes in the frame support. 3. Attach the frame support to the filter frame.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-17
To install the filter frame assembly: 1. Place the filter frame assembly at the rear of the lower bracket. 2. Insert the two front screws of the filter frame into the corresponding latch-shaped holes in the bracket. 3. Identify the four long screws according to the following figure.
Figure 4-12: Installing the filter frame assembly
4. Attach the filter frame to the shelf and fasten it with four long screws from the installation kit.
4-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install the vertical upper bracket: 1. Return the XDM-300 shelf to normal position. 2. Place the shelf near the edge of the surface to enable the lower bracket to protrude out. 3. Place the vertical upper bracket on the shelf, and fit the holes in the bracket with the corresponding holes in the shelf.
Figure 4-13: Installing the vertical upper bracket
4. Fasten the upper bracket to the shelf with seven screws and washers from the installation kit.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-19
To attach the thumbnuts: 1. Lift both filter frame front screws to their upmost position. 2. Take two thumbnuts from the installation kit and fasten them on the screws.
Figure 4-14: Installing the thumbnuts
4-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To attach an XDM-300 shelf to a rack in the vertical position: 1. Identify the prescribed position of the XDM-300 shelf in the rack in accordance with the rack installation plan. WARNING: To perform this procedure safely, for both personnel and equipment, get help from an additional person.
2. Place the XDM-300 shelf in the prescribed position in the rack. 3. Align the holes on the XDM-300's brackets with the holes at the rack's side rails. 4. Attach the shelf to the rack on the upmost hole of the left bracket, and lowest hole of the right bracket, with two screws and washers. 5. Secure the shelf to the rack with additional three screws and washers in each bracket.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-21
Installing the Vertical Air Filter

Normally, the filter frame is attached in its upmost position by two thumbnuts. The frame must be lowered in order to gain access to the filter guides and to install the filter. To lower the filter frame: 1. Open the two thumbnuts until the filter frame screws are free to move.
Figure 4-15: Releasing the thumbnuts
4-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2. Lower the filter frame screws to their very lowest position, to bring the filter guides in front of the opening in the lower bracket.
Figure 4-16: Lowering the filter frame
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-23
The following figure shows the filter frame in the lower position.
Figure 4-17: Filter frame in lower position
4-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To insert the vertical filter: 1. Identify the filter's air intake side indicated by two coding tabs. 2. Place the filter in front of the slot with the coding tabs facing downward.
Figure 4-18: Inserting the air filter
3. Insert the filter into the filter frame guides. 4. Push the filter in until it stops. 5. Lift the thumbnuts up and fasten them in place.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-25
Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf

Before you start: Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding Requirements (on page 1-8) and Preparing Cables and Fibers (on page 3-8). Obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the grounding connections in accordance with these requirements. WARNING:
The ground cable must be of at least the same thickness as the xRAP power cable. Therefore, if the xRAP power cable is thick, the grounding cable must match that thickness. The thickness of the shelf grounding cable must match the thickness of the power cable from the xRAP to the shelf.
4-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To ground the XDM-300: 1. Connect the rack grounding stud to the site grounding bar, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 4-19: XDM-300 shelf and rack grounding
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4-27
2. Connect the RAP grounding post to the rack grounding stud. 3. When NEBS compliance is required, for each XDM-300 shelf installed in the rack, connect a grounding strap from the two shelf grounding posts to the RAP grounding post. Note that the grounding strap lug must be inserted over both grounding posts. WARNING: To prevent possible damage to XDM equipment,
all racks and equipment must be completely grounded before connecting to the platform any external devices powered from an AC source (110/220 V). All grounding procedures described here must be completed before, for example, connecting an external PC to configure and initialize the NE management system.
4-28
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5
Card and Module Installation
In this chapter:
Installing XDM-300 Cards .............................................................................. 5-1 Installing XDM-300 Modules ....................................................................... 5-12 Installing TPU Modules................................................................................. 5-21 Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 Shelf ............................................... 5-27
Installing XDM-300 Cards

After the shelf has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards. Before you start: When installing cards, make sure to carefully align the card with the shelf guide rails. Hold the card straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent cards/modules. CAUTION:
If you feel resistance when inserting cards, immediately retract the card and repeat the process. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening card screws.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-1
FCU300 Card
The FCU300 card is installed in the rightmost vertical slot of the XDM-300.
Figure 5-1: Installing the FCU300
To install the FCU300 card: 1. Check that the FCU300 has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the FCU300 from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware version indicated on the units identification label. 4. Insert the rear end of the FCU300 into the card guides. 5. Push the FCU300 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the fan unit out and repeat the procedure. 6. Secure the FCU300 in place by tightening the two captive screws.
5-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
ECU300/ECU300-F Card
The ECU300/ECU300-F card is installed in the bottom horizontal slot of the card cage. Installation is identical for the ECU300/ECU300-F-F and ECU300/ECU300-F cards.
Figure 5-2: Installing the ECU300/ECU300-F
CAUTION: Take care not to change the position of the
ECU300/ECU300-F switches when inserting or removing a card. Always hold the ECU300/ECU300-F by grasping the sides of the card without touching any of the internal electronics or front panel switches and connectors.
To install the ECU300/ECU300-F card: 1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards identification labels. 4. Insert the rear end of the ECU300/ECU300-F into the card guides.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-3
5. Push the ECU300/ECU300-F in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 6. Secure the ECU300/ECU300-F in place by tightening the two captive screws.
MXC300 Card
The XDM-300 shelf always operates as redundant platforms, therefore each shelf must be equipped with two MXC300 cards installed, one in slot MXC-A (main card) and one in slot MXC-B (protection card).
Figure 5-3: Installing the MXC300
CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting an MXC300 into the

shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first, then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.
5-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install the MXC300 card: 1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards identification labels. 4. Press both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles. 5. Simultaneously push both handles forward. 6. Insert the rear end of the MXC300 card into the card guides. 7. If the NVM card was not installed in the MXC300, install it as follows: a. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during shipment. b. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any problems.
Figure 5-4: Installing the NVM in the MXC300
c. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the MXC300, and then insert its rear end (the end with the connector) in the card guides. Push the card in until it is locked in place.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-5
NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no
access to read/write and the system emits an NVM Cardout alarm.
d. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive screws. 8. Push the front panel of the MXC300 in until the extractor handles start to move inside, the card mates the chassis connectors, and the front of the card is flush with the front of the shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 9. Turn the two extractor handles simultaneously to the horizontal position to lock the card in place. 10. Secure the MXC300 in place by tightening the two captive screws. NOTE: Make sure that card is properly locked in place. Failure
to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf. If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted correctly or the extractor handles are not properly locked.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card:

The brown levers on the extractor handles operate microswitches that indicate to the XDM-300 platform that the MXC300 card is installed. These levers must be pressed first when replacing an MXC300.
WARNING:
To reset the system using the RESET button, you must first remove the NVM cover. To extract the NVM, press the release pushbutton using the cover as a tool.
5-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Quad I/O Cards

Quad I/O cards can be installed in two dedicated slots (QA, QB) called quad slots (as they occupy the space of four I/O module slots) in the XDM-300. When quad I/O cards are not needed, these slots can be utilized to install SIM16_1 modules by adding a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-5: Installing a quad I/O card
NOTE: When quad I/O cards or SIM16_1 modules are not
installed in slots QA, QB, the openings must be covered with blank panels to avoid cooling air escape and comply with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-7
To install a quad I/O card: 1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards identification labels. CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card into
the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.
4. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles. 5. Insert the rear end of the quad I/O card into the card guides. 6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 7. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place. 8. Secure the quad I/O card in place by tightening the two captive screws. 9. Install the SFP/XFP transceivers according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (on page 5-17).
5-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing Quad I/O Cards in Quad I/O Slots

Quad I/O cards (like SIM64_XFP, SIM 16_4 etc.) can also be installed in a quad of I/O slots (I1 to I4, I5 to I8, I9 to I12, and I13 to I16). To do so you must prepare the quad I/O slots to accommodate the card by removing the three I/O module guides between the slots and attaching an adapter on both sides. To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card installation: 1. Identify the quad I/O slots to be adapted for quad I/O card installation. 2. Identify the module guide to be removed, and remove the screw in front of the guide. 3. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-6: Removing a module guide
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the two other module guides.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-9
5. Identify the quad I/O card right adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-7: Installing the quad I/O card right adapter
6. Attach the adapter to the right side of the quad I/O slots with two screws from the installation kit as shown in the figure above. 7. Identify the left card adapter according to the following figure.
Figure 5-8: Installing the SIM64_XFP left adapter
8. Attach the adapter to the left side of the quad I/O slots with two screws from the installation kit as shown in the figure above.
5-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots: 1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards identification labels. 4. Check that the quad I/O slots have been prepared to accommodate the quad I/O card, as described in To prepare quad I/O slots for a quad I/O card installation (on page 5-9). CAUTION: Before extracting or inserting a quad I/O card into
the shelf, release the extractor handles by pressing the brown locks outward first and then pull/push both handles simultaneously. Failure to do so may damage the card.
5. Push both brown levers located on the card's extractor handles to release the handles. 6. Insert the rear end of the card into the card guides.
Figure 5-9: Installing a quad I/O card in quad I/O slots
7. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the card is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 8. Press both handles simultaneously to lock the card in place. 9. Secure the card in place by tightening the two captive screws. 10. Install the SFP/XFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (on page 5-17).
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-11
Installing XDM-300 Modules

This section describes the installation process for all XDM-300 modules. For a list and technical description of all available modules, refer to the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual, General Description, and XDM Technical Specifications. The installation procedure for each type of module is as follows:
Install I/O modules, including:
Optical and electrical modules (see Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (see "Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules" on page 5-12)) OHU module (see Installing the OHU Module (on page 5-18)) Double-slot modules (see Installing Double-Slot Modules (on page 5-19))
The optical I/O and optical aggregate modules use Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. The insertion of SFPs in the module slots is described in Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (see "Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules" on page 5-12). NOTE: You can install any combination of the different types
of I/O modules in the I/O modules cages.
Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules

The following procedure can also be used to replace cards and modules in an operating shelf, provided the general safety precautions listed in Work and Equipment Safety and the module-specific warnings listed in the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual for each module are strictly followed. Before starting, make sure that all the I/O modules specified for installation in the XDM-300 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available. All I/O modules are installed in slots I1 through I16, as shown in the following figure. In addition, if I/O cards are not installed in the wide slots (QA, QB), a SIM16_1 module can be installed in each of these positions, by adding a mechanical adapter. This section describes the installation of the electrical, optical, and CWDM I/O modules, which are single-slot modules. The installation of PIM2_63/B and MCSMs, which are double-slot modules, is described in Installing Double-Slot Modules (on page 5-19). In general, to facilitate easy cable routing, it is preferable to install all electrical modules on the one side of the XDM-300 shelf (left or right), and all optical and CWDM modules on the other side.
5-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme, electrical modules that have TPU protection should be arranged in pairs, one below the other. For 1:2 and 1:3 protection schemes, it is recommended that all electrical I/O modules be installed on one side of the XDM-300 shelf, in slots I1, I2, I5, and I6, or in slots I3, I4, I7, and I8 in the upper module cage, and I9, I10, I13, and I14, or in slots I11, I12, I15, and I16 in the lower module cage. CAUTION:
When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cover until an SFP is inserted. For your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and to prevent escape of ventilation from the fans through these openings, protect all unused slots with blank panels.
Figure 5-10: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O slots
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-13
To install an I/O electrical, optical, or CWDM module in the module cages: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides. 5. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure. CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully
align it with the cage guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components on adjacent modules.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws. 7. If you are installing an optical, CWDM, or mixed module with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards. (see "Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards" on page 5-17) After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.
5-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots

The quad slots QA and QB can be adapted to accommodate one SIM16_1 each by installing a mechanical adapter.
Figure 5-11: Installing the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter
To install the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter: 1. Check that the adapter has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the packaging bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the adapter from its protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Insert the rear end of the adapter into the card guides. 4. Push the adapter in until the front of it is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. If you feel resistance before the adapter is in place, pull it out and repeat the procedure. 5. Secure the adapter in place by tightening the two captive screws.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-15
To install a SIM16_1 module in a quad slot: 1. Check that the SIM16_1 mechanical adapter is properly installed in the corresponding quad slot. 2. Check that the SIM16_1 module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 3. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 5. Insert the rear end of the SIM16_1 into the module guides in the mechanical adapter. 6. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with the front of the adapter. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure. CAUTION: When inserting a module, make sure to carefully
align it with the adapter guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the process. Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull or push it slowly and carefully until it is in the correct position.
7. Fasten the module to the adapter by tightening the two fastening screws. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the screws. 8. Install the SFP transceiver according to Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards (on page 5-17).
5-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards

CAUTION: During the installation of SFP/XFP transceivers in
optical or CWDM modules and cards, make sure that all optical LC connectors are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the covers until an optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.
To install SFP/XFP transceivers in optical or CWDM I/O modules and cards: 1. Identify the prescribed position on the module according to the site installation plan. 2. Check that the SFP/XFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 3. Remove the SFP/XFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP/XFP identification labels. 5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP/XFP transceiver. 6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly backwards to mate the connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the transceiver and repeat the procedure.
Figure 5-12: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered.
If you have to replace a module or card, remove the SFP/XFP first.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-17
Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s

An I/O slot that accommodates a PIM2_21 can be expanded to 42 E1s by replacing it with a PIM2_42 and reassigning the slot as PIM2_42, through management. Before you start: Check that the items required for the expansion are available, including:

PIM2_42 module Adapter cable between traffic cable connected to the PIM2_21 (that is disconnected) and the connector on the PIM2_42 Traffic cable for connecting the additional 21 E1s from the PIM2_42 and the customer's DDF
To expand a PIM2_21 to 42 E1s: 1. Identify the PIM2_21 I/O slot to be expanded. 2. Disconnect the double SCSI connector from the PIM2_21. 3. Open the two captive screws, fastening the PIM2_21 to the XDM-300, and pull the module out. 4. Install the PIM2_42 in the slot of the removed module, as described in To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage. 5. Connect the end of the adapter with the double SCSI connector to the traffic cable removed from the PIM2_21 in step 2. 6. Connected the other end of the adapter cable with the 100-pin SCSI connector to the upper connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 1-21). 7. Connect the traffic cable for the additional 21 E1s to the lower connector on the PIM2_42 (marked 22-42). The other end of this cable is open, and should be connected to the customer's DDF.
Installing the OHU module

The OHU installation is identical to the installation of I/O modules described in To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules cage.
5-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing Double-Slot Modules

Before you start: Make sure that all the double-slot modules (PIM2_63s or MCSMs) specified for installation in the XDM-300 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are available.
Figure 5-13: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the XDM-300
Because the PIM 2_63s and MCSMs occupy a pair of slots each, before you can install them you must first remove the guide between the pair of slots.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-19
To remove a module guide from the lower row of slots: 1. Identify the module guide you are removing and remove the screw from the front of the guide. 2. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 5-14: Removing the module guide
CAUTION: Do not allow the metal part you are removing to
touch any modules or other parts of the XDM-300 cage. This may cause a short-circuit and damage the modules.
To install a double-slot module in the modules cage: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides. 5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
5-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. 7. If you are installing MCSMs with SFP transceivers, proceed to Installing, Optical, CWDM and Electrical I/O Modules (see "Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules" on page 5-12). NOTE: Only FE SFP transceivers can be inserted into FE
ports; you can insert either GbE SFP or FE SFP transceivers into GbE/FE ports.
8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all free slots.
Installing TPU Modules

This section provides instructions for:

Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (on page 5-22) Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-23) Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU (on page 5-24) Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-24) Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-26)
Before you start:
Make sure that the TC/TCF module and all the TPMs specified for installation in the XDM-300 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-21
Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf

The TC/TCF module is installed in the right slot of the TPU.
Figure 5-15: Inserting the TC module (XDM-300)
To install a TC/TCF module in the TPU: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding TC/TCF module guides. 5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the TC/TCF module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure. 6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws.
5-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules. The installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules is described in Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-24).
Figure 5-16: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300)
To install a single-slot TPM in the TPU: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides. 5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. 7. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU

NOTE: When optical amplifiers are installed in the TPU, you
must install a TCF to allow sufficient cooling air flow through the amplifiers. The management system will block the configuration of optical amplifiers, if a TCF is not installed.
The installation of optical amplifiers in the TPU is identical to the installation of a single-slot TPM in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-23).
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules. Double-slot modules can be placed in slot pairs TPM1 and TPM2 or TPM3 and TPM4. Before you can install a double-slot TPM, you must first remove the module guide between the two slots.
Figure 5-17: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300)
5-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To remove a TPM guide: 1. Identify the module guide you are removing. 2. Remove the two uppermost screws and the two lowest screws from the front of the TPM guide. 3. Gently pull the TPM guide out.
Figure 5-18: Removing a TPM guide
To install a double-slot TPM in the TPU: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides. 5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure. 6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. 7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-25
Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of triple-slot (1:2 protection) modules, which are accommodated in slots TPM1, TPM2, and TPM3 (slot TPM4 remains free). Before you start: 1. Before installing a triple-slot TPM, remove the two module guides between the three slots. See To remove a TPM guide (on page 5-25). 2. Make sure that all the TPMs specified for installation in the XDM-300 in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
Figure 5-19: Inserting a triple-slot TPM in the TPU (XDM-300)
To install a triple-slot TPM in the TPU: 1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules identification labels. 4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the corresponding module guides.
5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the module is flush with the front of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure. 6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. 7. After inserting the modules, check for correct installation against the module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 Shelf

The XDM-300 shelf can be expanded with one or two TPU expansion shelves. The TPU can be attached on top of the XDM-300 and/or directly under it. Alternatively, a single OCU expansion shelf can be attached directly on top of the XDM-300 or on top of a TPU that is installed on the XDM-300. NOTE: The OCU cannot be installed under the XDM-300
shelf.
When you order an XDM-300 system with one or two TPUs, the shelf is supplied with the TPUs installed and their fastening brackets attached to each one. The same applies to OCU shelves. If your XDM-300 shelf does not include TPU protection, it is possible to upgrade your system and add one or two TPUs and an OCU at a later stage, provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. You need at least 150 mm space above/under the XDM-300 for each TPU/OCU. The TPUs can be installed without disconnecting any of the XDM-300 cables and fibers and without affecting traffic not going via a TPU. CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an
ECI Telecom trained field engineer.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-27
Installing a TPU/OCU on the XDM-300 shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU/OCU on top of an XDM-300 shelf. To install a TPU on top of the XDM-300 shelf: 1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelfs identification labels. 4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the XDM-300 so that they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the TPU is inserted on the rack. 5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU connector in place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the XDM-300 shelf). Remove the cover.
Figure 5-20: Removing the TPU connector from the XDM-300
5-28
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the XDM-300 shelf.
Figure 5-21: Inserting the TPU connector onto the XDM-300
7. Orient the TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface. 8. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides on the bottom of the TPU. 9. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into the TPU.
Figure 5-22: Installing the pin guides in the TPU
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-29
10. Turn the TPU back to normal position. 11. Carefully lower the TPU onto the XDM-300 shelf, taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-23: Lowering the TPU onto the XDM-300
12. Insert the three long screws, supplied with the installation kit, into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU in place.
Figure 5-24: Securing the TPU onto the XDM-300
5-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
13. Insert the TC module in the TPU, as described in Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf (on page 5-22). 14. Insert the TPMs in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-23) and Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 5-24). 15. If the I/O modules to be protected by the TPU are already connected to traffic cables, disconnect them. 16. Connect the TPMs to the relevant I/O modules, as described in Installing TPU Modules (on page 5-21). CAUTION: Insert/extract the TPU in/from an XDM-300 only when it is empty (no TC/TCF or TPMs are assembled in it).
Installing a TPU under the XDM-300 Shelf

The following section describes the procedure for installing a TPU under an XDM-300 shelf. To install a TPU under the XDM-300 shelf: 1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelfs identification labels. 4. Turn the XDM-300 shelf so that its rear faces the front. 5. Lift the XDM-300 on its far lower edge to gain access to the bottom surface, as shown in the following figure.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-31
Figure 5-25: Installing the XDM-300 pin guides and removing the lower connector cover
6. Open the two captive screws fastening the lower TPU connector cover to the shelf. Remove the cover. 7. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the shelf (see the figure above). 8. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely in place. 9. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the XDM-300 shelf (see installation of the H-connector in Inserting the TPU connector onto the XDM-300 (on page 5-29)). Note that the connector should be installed with the angled corner facing backwards. 10. Open the two screws securing the TPU connector cover (located at the back right corner, on top of the TPU). Remove the cover. 11. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the TPU shelf (keep the screws handy). Remove the bracket. 12. Orient the TPU on a clean flat surface, upside down. 13. Place the TPU's fastening bracket (removed in step 12) on the TPU and attach it with the six screws.
5-32
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Figure 5-26: Assembling the TPU bracket and jumper connector
14. Open the two captive screws fastening the second connector cover to the TPU. Remove the cover. 15. Take the jumper connector from the installation kit and insert it into the connector house. 16. Fasten the jumper connector in place with three screws from the installation kit. 17. Turn the TPU back to regular position. 18. Carefully lower the XDM-300 shelf onto the TPU, taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots, as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-27: Lowering the XDM-300 onto the TPU
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-33
19. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the TPU in place.
Figure 5-28: Securing the lower TPU to the shelf
Adding a Second TPU/OCU

If your XDM-300 already has a TPU/OCU, it is possible to upgrade your system and add an additional TPU/OCU cage on top of the first, provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be a space of at least 150 mm above the expanded XDM-300 for installing the TPU/OCU. The second TPU/OCU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the expanded XDM-300 system cables and fibers, and without affecting traffic that is not going via the TPU/OCU. CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by an
ECI Telecom trained field engineer.
5-34
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To install an additional TPU/OCU on the expanded XDM-300 shelf: 1. Check that the additional TPU/OCU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed. 2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf identification labels. 4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the expanded XDM-300 so that they will not unintentionally be disconnected when the additional TPU/OCU is inserted on the rack. 5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU/OCU connector in place (located at the back right corner on the top of the first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure). Remove the cover.
Figure 5-29: Removing the connector cover and fastening bracket from the first TPU/OCU
6. Open the six screws securing the fastening bracket to the first TPU/OCU shelf installed on the expanded XDM-300 (see the previous figure). 7. Open the two screws fastening the bracket to the rack. Remove the bracket. 8. Orient the second TPU upside down, on a clean flat surface.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-35
9. Identify the two threaded holes for the pin guides at the bottom of the second TPU. 10. Take two pin guides from the installation kit and screw them securely into the TPU.
Figure 5-30: Installing the pin guides in the TPU
11. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the first TPU/OCU shelf, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 5-31: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector onto the first TPU/OCU in the XDM-300
5-36
417006-2311-0H3-B00
12. Carefully lower the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-300 (on the first TPU/OCU shelf), taking care that the pin guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-32: Lowering the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-300
13. Insert the three long screws supplied in the installation kit into the appropriate holes, as illustrated in the following figure, and secure the second TPU/OCU in place.
Figure 5-33: Securing the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-300
417006-2311-0H3-B00
5-37
5-38
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6
Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing
In this chapter:
Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks ............................................. 6-1
Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks

In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A rack. Traffic cables from the lower part of the XDM-300 shelf (lower module cage and lower TPU) should be routed through the cable guide, and the surplus folded on the cable slack tray.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-1
Figure 6-1: Routing cables and fibers in an ETSI A rack
6-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Connecting Power Cables

The power cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the MXC300 cards. To connect power cables: NOTE: To facilitate power cables routing, it is recommended
to start from the XDM-300 shelf towards the RAP.
1. Connect the connector at the end of the power cable to the POWER connector of the MXC300 in slot MXC-A, and fasten it with its two screws. 2. Grasp the connector at the other end of the power cable, and thread it through the opening in the left bracket of the XDM-300 shelf. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second power cable to be connected to the corresponding MXC300 in slot MXC-B. 4. Bend the cables and thread them through the side cable guides of the rack. Pull the cables until the cable connectors are positioned against the appropriate connectors on the RAP. 5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails. NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in
Installing the xRAP-100 (on page 3-65), and the xRAP-D installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (on page 3-51).
6. Connect the free ends of the power cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags to the DC power connectors on the RAP. CAUTION: Do not extract/insert an MXC300 card while the
DC cables are connected to it.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-3
Connecting Alarm Cables

The alarm cables are connected to the corresponding connectors on the ECU300/ECU300-F front panel. To connect alarm cables: 1. Route the alarm cables leading from the RAP along the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-300 shelf (see "Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks" on page 6-1). NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is described in Installing the xRAP-100 (on page 3-65), and the xRAP-D installation is described in Installing the xRAP-D (on page 3-51). 2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate alarm connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F. 3. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails. 4. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F front panel.
6-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards

All optical fibers in the XDM-300 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on the SFP/XFP transceivers. Before you start: Before installing the XDM-300 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be routed through the conduits running along the front supports of ECI Telecoms recommended rack. From the conduits, the fibers should be routed into the FSTs installed above and under (in horizontal installations) the XDM-300 shelf you are installing and threaded into the FST, as described in Installing the FST (on page 3-89). CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
To connect an optical fiber to an XDM-300 module/card: 1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the FST out towards you. 2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the tray. NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it fully.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level. 4. At the desired level lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide. 5. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated module/card. Leave some slack to prevent stress.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-5
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved cleaning kit. 7. Remove the cover from the module/card connector, and connect the fiber connector to the module/card connector. 8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for all optical modules/cards in the XDM-300 shelf. 9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules/cards, gently push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules

NOTE: The procedures in this section describe the connection
of traffic cables directly to I/O modules in the XDM-300 shelf. If your installation includes a TPU protection scheme, some of the cables will be connected to the relevant TPM in the TPU instead of to the I/O module, according to the site installation plan. Connection of the I/O modules to the TPMs is described in Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (on page 6-18).
Routing and connecting multipair cables

Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces located on the PIM2_21, PIM2_63, and PIM2_63S electrical connection modules. One or three pairs of cables are connected to the module, respectively. Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or receive). The cable end connecting to the XDM-300 shelf is terminated in 2 x 50-pin SCSI male connectors, or 2 x 136-pin VHDCI male connectors (for PIM2_63S). If you are using an xDDF-21 patch panel, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant xDDF-21 patch panel to the XDM-300 shelf location. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing. Note that the cable must be connected to the rear of the patch panel before it is secured in place.
6-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To connect multipair cables: 1. Arrange the multipair traffic cables and route them through the cable guides attached to the rack side rails. 2. Pull each multipair cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical connection module. 3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf (for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes. 4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and through the appropriate opening of the cable guide serving the shelf, until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate slot. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails. 5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate module connectors with the appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if necessary. 6. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding module. CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure
the cable connector, as this may damage the module.
7. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver (maximum blade size 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 N cm to 44 N cm.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-7
Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S

The PIM2_63S has a special 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to make the connection. The cable is constructed of three main parts:

Double 136-pin VHDCI male connector with six 30AWG cable tails Conversion cable-size box Three pairs of 26AWG cables
The following figure shows the PIM2_63S traffic cable.
Figure 6-2: PIM2_63S traffic cable
The six 30AWG cables connect on one side to the double 136-pin VHDCI connector and on the other side to the conversion box. The conversion box connects between the six 30AWG wires and three pairs of 26AWG wires, making the wire-size conversion. The 26AWG cables are connected at the other end to the customer's DDF. Each cable in a pair is bonded to the other, shaping a figure-eight pattern.
6-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Each pair of the 26AWG cables carries 21 E1s totaling 63 E1s; to facilitate identification of the E1 groups each cable pair is marked with color strips along its jacket, according to the following key:

First pair, E1s No. 1 to 21 - Red strips Second pair, E1s No. 22 to 42 - Blue strips Third pair, E1s No. 43 to 63 - Yellow strips
Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S

The PIM2_63S has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector for connecting to its 63 x E1 interfaces. A special cable offered by ECI Telecom is used to make the connection. For a detailed description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S (on page 6-8). The connector on the cable has a pin guide that must be inserted into the corresponding hole, to the upper right side of PIM2_63S connector. Special box trays installed above and below the XDM-300 shelf help neatly route of the PIM2_63S cables. These units enable to keep the path of the cables in the short rout between the module on the shelf and the conversion box (on the cable). In addition, the organized installation and route of the cables ensure smooth closure of the rack's door. To connect the PIM2_63S traffic cable: 1. Identify the pin guide on the traffic cable connector and the corresponding hole on the PIM2_63S. 2. Insert the pin guide into the corresponding hole near the PIM2_63S connector. 3. Gently push the cable connector into the corresponding PIM2_63S connector. If resistance is felt before the connectors are mate, pull the connector out and repeat the procedure.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-9
4. Secure the connector in place by tightening its four captive screws.
Figure 6-3: PIM2_63S traffic cable installation
To route the PIM2_63S traffic cable: 1. Bend the cables from the connector installed in the previous procedure towards the cable guide on the box tray (see the preceding figure). 2. Insert a cable tie into the corresponding holes in the cable guide; route the cables through the cable tie and tighten it on the cables. 3. Route the cables inside the tray and insert the box grooves into the corresponding guides in the tray (see the preceding figure). 4. Route the long part of the cables coming from the box towards the rack side rails. 5. Fasten the cables to the rack side rails with cable ties as necessary.
6-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel

The xDDF-21 is installed above the XDM-300 shelf accessories. To install an xDDF-21 patch panel: 1. Route the 2 x 50-pin SCSI cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63/B along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-21 patch panel will be installed. 2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and should be connected to their respective connectors. 3. Leaving at least 100 mm free space above the XDM-300 shelf accessories and below the xDDF-21, attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure, using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts. 4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the inside of the panel door.
Routing and connecting coaxial cables

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on PIM345_3, and SIM1_4/E modules. Depending on the module type, a maximum of eight cables can be connected to each module. As part of site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the relevant High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended rack location, and connected to the coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors supplied with the XDM-300 shelf. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the cables to the appropriate level in the rack. To connect coaxial traffic cables to an XDM-300 module: 1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups according to the designated module, and route them along the guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-300 unit. 2. Pull each coaxial cable up or down to the level of the corresponding electrical connection module. 3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf (for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes. 4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails. 5. Cut excess cable length if necessary. 6. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding electrical connection connector on the module.
Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the XDM-300

The optional TPU shelf can be mounted on top and/or under the XDM-300 shelf to add I/O protection capability to the platform. Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both operating and protection I/O modules in the XDM-300 shelf. If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules, the TC module in the TPU switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection module. The TPU has four slots for TPMs. The modules are connected to the main and protection I/O modules by traffic cables, and the client's traffic is connected directly to the TPMs. TPMs support the electrical PIMs and SIMs with the following protection schemes:
TPMs for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to a single I/O module TPMs for a 1:2 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to one or two I/O modules TPMs for a 1:3 protection scheme, where one protection module is connected to two or three I/O modules
The TPU connects to a connector on top of the XDM-300 shelf. Similarly the lower TPU connects to a connector at the bottom of the shelf. These connectors provide the power and control buses required for the TPU operation. The modules in the TPU are distributed as follows:
The rightmost TPU slot is allocated for the TC module. The TC module is described in the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual. The other four slots are used for any combination of TPMs (single slot, double-slot, or triple-slot modules are supported). TPM2_1 TPM2_3 TPM2_42_2 TPM2_63_2 TPMH_1
The TPMs available for the I/O protection are:

6-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Each TPM is dedicated for protection of a specific traffic rate and protection scheme. The TPM name designates the protected traffic rate and the protection scheme, as follows:

The first digit after the name designates the traffic rate. The last digit after the underscore designates the protection scheme.
For example, the TPM2_3 is a module for 2 Mbps traffic, and supports a protection scheme of 1:3. Similarly TPMH_1 is a module for High rate traffic (including 34/45 Mbps and 155 Mbps), and a protection scheme of 1:1. The following table summarizes the available TPMs, the type of I/O modules they protect, the traffic rate, and the protection scheme.
Table 6-1: XDM-300 protection schemes TPM Type Protected I/O module Traffic rate Protection scheme
TPM2_1 TPM2_3 TPM2_42_2 TPM2_63_2 TPMH_1
PIM2_21 PIM2_21 PIM2_42 PIM2_63/B, PIM2_42 PIM345, SIM1_4/E
2 Mbps 2 Mbps 2 Mbps 2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps, 155 Mbps
1:1 1:3 1:2 1:2 1:1
In the specific XDM-300 protection schemes, the location of the protection module (P) and the protected module (M) is allocated by the system's management software. Therefore the I/O modules must be installed in the allocated slots, and connected to the corresponding TPMs. The following sections provide schematic diagrams and tables for the connections of the XDM-300 shelf in the various protection schemes.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-13
XDM-300 1:1 protection scheme connections

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:1 protection scheme for an XDM-300 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_1 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the XDM-300 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.
Figure 6-4: XDM-300 1:1 protection scheme example
The following table shows the slot association for 1:1 protection scheme in the XDM-300.
Table 6-2: XDM-300 slots allocation for protection schemes TPU slots I/O slot allocation Protection Main
M1-1 M1-2 M1-3 M1-4 M3-1 M3-2 M3-3 M3-4
I1 I2 I3 I4 I9 I10 I11 I12
I5 I6 I7 I8 I13 I14 I15 I16
6-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:2 protection scheme for an XDM-300 populated with PIM2_63 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_63_2 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the XDM-300 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.
Table 6-3: XDM-300 1:2 I/O protection TPU slots I/O slot allocation Protection Main
M1-1, M1-2, and M1-3 M3-1, M3-2, and M3-3
I1 and I2 I9 and I10
I5 and I6 I7 and I8 I13 and I14 I15 and I16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-15

The following figure shows an example of a typical 1:3 protection scheme for an XDM-300 populated with PIM2_21 modules in the upper and lower module cages and TPM2_3 modules in the upper and lower TPUs. The marking P in the XDM-300 shelf designates the Protection module, and M the Main (working) module.
Table 6-4: XDM-300 1:3 I/O protection TPU slots I/O slot allocation Protection Main
M1-1 and M1-2 M1-3 and M1-4 M3-1 and M3-2 M3-3 and M3-4
I1 I3 I9 I11
I2, I5, I6 I4, I7, I8 I10, I13, I14 I12, I15, I16
6-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for the XDM-300

The TPM2_42_2 supports four protection groups of two PIM2_42 cards protected in each.
Figure 6-7: TPM2_42_2 protection slot allocation in XDM-300
The following table describes the slot assignment of the TPM2_42_2 in the TPU and the PIM2_42 in the XDM-300 shelf.
Table 6-5: TPM2_42_2 and PIM2_42 slot assignment in the XDM-300 TPU slots I/O Slot Allocation Protection Main
M1-1 and M1-2 M1-3 and M1-4 M3-1 and M3-2 M3-3 and M3-4
I1 I3 I9 I11
I5 and I6 I7 and I8 I13 and I14 I15 and I16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-17
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU

The type of cable used to connect the I/O modules to the TPMs depends on the type of I/O module being protected, as follows:
For PIM2_21s, 2 x 50 to 1 x 100 SCSI cables are supplied, to be connected from four different PIM2_21s to connectors PIM2_21 #1, PIM2_21 #2, PIM2_21 #3, and PIM2_21 PROTECT at the bottom of the TPM2_3. Multipair traffic cables are connected to the DDF#1, DDF#2, and DDF#3 connectors at the top of the TPM2_3.
The connection between TPM2_3s and PIM2_21s is shown in the following figure. Connections are between a connector in the TPM and the corresponding module in the shelf, where P denotes protection and 1, 2, and 3 are for reference purposes.
For PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E modules, the supplied cables enable connection from the DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors on the I/O module to the 8W8 MAIN and PROTECT connectors at the bottom of the TPM-H_1. The traffic coaxial cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors at the top of the TPM-H_1. These connections are shown in the following figure.
6-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
NOTE: The cable used to connect the PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E

to the TPM-H_1 ends with eight coaxial cables:
When protecting a PIM345_3, six coaxial cables are connected and two remain unused. When protecting a SIM1_4/E, all eight coaxial cables are connected.
Figure 6-9: Connecting to a TPMH_1 protection with an XDM-300
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-19
The following figure shows connection to 252 E1s with 1:2 protection. Six PIM2_63 modules are connected in the XDM-300 shelf protected by two TPM2_63_2 modules in the TPUs.
Figure 6-10: XDM-300 with 252 E1s in 1:2 protection connections
6-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Routing and Connecting Cables to Data Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs)

Depending on the data module in your XDM-300 shelf, data cables with RJ45 connectors or optical fibers with LC connectors are used to connect to the module, as described in the following procedures. To connect Ethernet cables to a data module: NOTE: To support the Autonegotiation feature on electrical ports, use CAT5E SFTP 2-pair or 4-pair straight cable to connect 10/100BaseT ports, or CAT5E SFTP 4-pair straight cable to connect 1000BaseT ports. 1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups according to the designated data module, and route them along the guides at the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-300 unit. 2. Pull each data cable up or down to the level of the corresponding data module. 3. Leave a spare length of 20 cm to 30 cm of cable folded on top of the shelf (for modules in the upper module cage) or on the cable slack tray (for modules in the lower module cage) for future maintenance purposes. 4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and through the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails. 5. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector on the data module.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-21
Connecting an optical fiber to a data module

The following procedure describes how to connect an optical fiber to a data module. Before you start: Prior to installing the XDM-300 shelf and modules, route all optical fibers through the conduits running along the front supports of the XDM-300s recommended rack. From the conduits, route the fibers into the FST above the XDM-300 shelf you are installing and thread them into the FST, as described in Installing the FST (on page 3-89). CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are
To connect an optical fiber to a data module: 1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the FST out towards you. 2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the tray. 3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level. 4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide. 5. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the SFP transceiver LC connector on the designated data module. Leave some slack to prevent stress. 6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved cleaning kit. 7. Remove the cover from the SFP transceiver, and connect the fiber connector to the SFP connector. 8. Repeat Steps 2 to 7 for all optical data modules in the XDM-300 shelf. 9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
6-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3 and T4 connectors of the ECU300/ECU300-F. Each cable is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. To connect a timing cable to the XDM-300 shelf: 1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-300 shelf. 2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F. 3. Connect the free ends of the cables in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags, to connectors T3 and T4 on the ECU300/ECU300-F. CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure
the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU300/ECU300-F.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws. 5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.
Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT on the ECU300/ECU300-F. Each cable is terminated in an RJ-45 plug. The cable from the management station must be plugged into the MANAGMENT MAIN connector in the ECU300/ECU300-F or ECU300/ECU300-F-F card. If more than one shelf has to be connected to the management, a daisy chain interconnection is used to distribute management to the shelves for either ECU300/ECU300-F or ECU300/ECU300-F-F cards. In this configuration, the cable from the management station is connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the first shelf, the PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf is connected to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-23
To connect management cables to the XDM-300 shelf equipped with an ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F: 1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-300 shelf. 2. Pull each cable down to the level of the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F and bend it until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing connector on the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F. 3. Connect the management station cable to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the first shelf, in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags. 4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect a management cable from the PROT/LCT connector of the first shelf to the MANAGEMENT MAIN connector of the second shelf, and so on. 5. Secure each cable connector using its two screws. CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure
the cable connector, as this may damage the ECU300/ECU300-F/ECU300/ECU300-F-F.
6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the shelves.
Tool Kit
ECI Telecom offers a tool kit to facilitate extraction/insertion of connectors and optical SFP transceivers connected to ports in very high density cabling environments. The tool kit is packed in a compact box and enables the technical staff to handle installation and maintenance activities in a quick and efficient fashion, without affecting traffic of a neighboring connector that should not be removed. The kit includes the following tools:

RJ-45 extractor LC connector extraction/insertion and optical SFP extractor (all in the same tool) DIN 1.0/2.3 (regular and small profile) connector extractor Pincers
6-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Extracting RJ-45 connectors

The RJ-45 extractor tool enables easy extraction of RJ-45 connectors located in very high density cabling environments. The extractor is designed to remove connectors connected to modules that include one or two rows of data ports (for example, DIOM_08 and MCSM modules). The general view of the tool is shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-11: RJ-45 extractor
To extract an RJ-45 connector from an upper port row: 1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-12: Inserting the cables (upper row)
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-25
2. Move extractor forward to attach the far groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-13: Attaching the extractor to the handle (upper row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion. 4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector out.
Figure 6-14: Extracting the connector (upper row)
6-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
To extract an RJ-45 connector from a lower port row: 1. Insert the cables (or cable) into the extractor as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-15: Inserting the cables (lower row)
2. Move extractor forward to attach the near groove to the module's handle.
Figure 6-16: Attaching the extractor to the handle (lower row)
3. Press the extractor's bent edge on the connector's protrusion.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-27
4. Hold the cable near the connector to be extracted and pull the connector out.
Figure 6-17: Extracting the connector (lower row)
Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and SFPs

The LC/SFP extractor is a multipurpose tool enabling the extraction/insertion of LC connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for example, LC connectors cabled near multiple adjacent SFPs). The tool is also designed to extract SFP transceivers. The following figure shows the LC/SFP extractor.
Figure 6-18: LC/SFP extractor
Before you start: Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (on page 6-28). Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure.
To extract an LC connector: 1. Insert the fiber near the boot under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-19: Inserting the fiber into the extractor
2. Push the extractor straight forward and press its release tab onto the SFP's clip, until it clicks over top of the clip.
Figure 6-20: Pressing extractor's release tab onto SFP's clip
3. Pull out the extractor with the fiber.
Figure 6-21: Extracting the LC connector
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-29
4. Move the fiber backward till its connector is beyond the extractor's tab.
Figure 6-22: Moving the connector beyond the tab
5. Remove the fiber from the extractor.
Figure 6-23: Removing the fiber
Before you start: Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (on page 6-28). Fold the SFP extractor lever into tool's wide end. Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure. To insert an LC connector: 1. Insert the fiber near its boot, under the extractor's narrow end tab. Orient connector's clip in front of the tool's teeth.
Figure 6-24: Inserting the fiber into extractor's narrow end
6-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the connector's clip.
Figure 6-25: Moving extractor's end to the connector
3. Insert the connector into the SFP until it locks.
Figure 6-26: Inserting the connector into the SFP
4. Gently pull the extractor back until its edge is beyond the boot.
Figure 6-27: Moving the extractor backward
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-31
5. Remove the extractor from the fiber near the boot.
Figure 6-28: Removing the extractor from the fiber
Before you start: Identify the LC/SFP extractor according to LC/SFP extractor (on page 6-28). Fold the SFP extractor lever into the tool's narrow end. Use the tool's narrow side to perform the following procedure. To extract an SFP transceiver: 1. Orient the extractor in front of the SFP.
Figure 6-29: Orienting the extractor in front of the SFP
2. Push the extractor forward until stopped by the SFP.
Figure 6-30: Moving the extractor forward
6-32
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3. Push the extractor forward to fit SFP's middle partition into extractor's edge slot.
Figure 6-31: Fitting SFP's partition into extractor's slot
4. Move the extractor's teeth to the right (toward the SFP clip).
Figure 6-32: Moving extractor toward SFP clip
5. Pull the extractor slightly backward. Make sure that the clip is grasped and moves with the tool.
Figure 6-33: Pulling the extractor backward with grasped clip
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-33
6. Slide the lever forward to lock the SFP's clip, and press slightly.
Figure 6-34: Locking the clip between lever and extractor's teeth
7. With the clip locked, pull the extractor backward to rotate the clip by` 90, and release the SFP from its housing.
Figure 6-35: Releasing the SFP from housing
8. Gently pull the SFP and extract it from the housing.
Figure 6-36: Extracting the SFP
NOTE: It is very important to keep the SFPs locked during the

last three steps of the procedure.
6-34
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors

The DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor tool enables the extraction/insertion of coaxial connectors connected in very high density cabling environments (for example, coaxial connectors cabled near multiple adjacent electrical SFPs). The following figure identifies the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector extractor.
Figure 6-37: DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor
Before you start: Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (on page 6-35). Use the tool's narrow end to perform the following procedure.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-35
To extract a DIN1.0/2.3 connector: 1. Place the extractor on the coaxial cable in front of the connector.
Figure 6-38: Placing the extractor in front of the connector
2. Push the extractor forward and attach the end tabs on the connector's step.
Figure 6-39: Attaching the extractor to the connector's step
6-36
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3. Pull the extractor with the connector backward and release the connector.
Figure 6-40: Extracting the connector
Before you start: Identify the coaxial extractor according to DIN 1.0/2.3 extractor (on page 6-35). Use the tool's wide end to perform the following procedure. To insert a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector: 1. Insert the coaxial cable near its boot, under the extractor's wide end tab.
Figure 6-41: Inserting the coaxial cable into the extractor
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-37
2. Pull the cable backward until the connector's edge is stopped by the tab.
Figure 6-42: Positioning the connector in the extractor
3. Push the extractor with the connector forward until it clicks into the SFP.
Figure 6-43: Inserting the connector
6-38
417006-2311-0H3-B00
4. Gently pull the extractor backward and release it from the cable.
Figure 6-44: Removing the extractor
417006-2311-0H3-B00
6-39
6-40
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7
Commissioning Tests
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 7-1 Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 7-2 Site Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 7-3 Network Commissioning Tests ....................................................................... 7-6
Overview
The commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the design specifications. This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the XDM-300, and provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks. The commissioning procedures include:
Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper functionality of the site. Network commissioning tests, performed at the network level. These include:
SDH commissioning tests, to ensure proper SDH functionality of the integrated network Data network commissioning tests, to ensure proper data functionality of the integrated network Optical network commissioning tests, to ensure proper optical functionality of the integrated network
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-1
Commissioning Tests
The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:

Test Equipment Site Commissioning Tests (on page 7-3) Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-6) SDH Commissioning Tests (on page 7-6) Data Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-16) Optical Network Commissioning Tests (on page 7-20) NOTES: Personnel involved in the execution and supervision
of commissioning tests must be familiar with the applicable safety precautions and requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, the tests described in these sections apply to all XDM shelves and to both SDH and SONET.
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:

Optical power meter (OPM) Optical spectrum analyzer (recommended for measurements at points carrying multiple wavelengths, for example, inputs and outputs of optical amplifiers) Optical BER tester Set of optical attenuators with various values Variable optical attenuator FC-to-LC and FC-to-SC adapters FC/FC optical patch cords Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for specific recommendations.
7-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Site Commissioning Tests

The site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of XDM-300 network elements. Perform the following procedures on each network element at each site:

Verification of cards and modules installed in each shelf Visual inspection and mechanical checks Optical level measurements (see reference data in the XDM-300 System Specifications manual)
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each Shelf

This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have been installed in each site, and to record their firmware versions and serial numbers. The following table provides a typical form for recording the cards and modules installed in an XDM-300 shelf.
Table 7-1: Card and module inventory Card/Module type Slot Boot version Serial number
NOTES: Make sure that the boot version of each card and
module matches the embedded version. If the equipment is already connected to a management station, use the Inventory window to collect the information and print the relevant data. Refer to the ECI Telecom management system user manual for detailed instructions.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-3
Commissioning Tests
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation. Refer to:
Equipment Installation (see "Platform Installation" on page 4-1) criteria for proper equipment installation Site cabling diagram criteria for proper cabling routing
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 to 9 in table Visual inspection and mechanical checks (on page 7-4)), power on the XDM-300 shelves to perform an additional set of acceptance tests (items 10 to 13 in table Visual inspection and mechanical checks (on page 7-4)). These tests check the functions needed for continuing the execution of the network commissioning tests. Refer to the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual for a description of the various card indicators and their functions. The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual inspection and mechanical check.
Table 7-2: Visual inspection and mechanical checks No. Description of inspection/check Results
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Check mechanical mounting of the rack. Install the DC power cable (main fuse to RAP; RAP fuse to shelf). Ground the cable connections. Install the DDF and connect the cables. Install the ODF and connect the cables. Install the network manager station (if applicable). Unpack the cards and insert them into the shelves. Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to the ___V RAP (-40 V to -75 V). Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to the RAP (-40 V to -75 V). Power on the shelves. Check the proper operation of both RAP power sources by disconnecting one source at a time. Check the communication between the shelf and the Craft terminal via the shelf SLIP interface. Check the proper operation of all FCU300s. Check LED operation by pressing the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F. ___V
7-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
No.
Description of inspection/check
Results
15. 16. 17.
Check the installation of Cisco ATA-186/Cisco 2600/Call Manager (if applicable). Check slot assignment for all relevant cards. Check that there are no abnormal alarms.
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports. Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels, within the limits specified in the XDM-300 System Specifications, must be achieved for each optical component. Perform these measurements using an Optical Power Meter (OPM) configured according to the wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 6.6 foot / 2-meter cable. When measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that the power does not exceed the maximum OPM input level. The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the optical level measurements.
Table 7-3: Measured optical levels Slot Module type Port Wavelength Optical transmit level (dBm) Receive level (dBm)
The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:
The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified in the XDM-300 System Specifications for the transceiver plug-in type installed on the corresponding port. The measured power must be within the expected range according to the optical network plan.
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for relevant port and optical transceiver plug-in specifications and network planning data. An OK result means that the port meets both criteria.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-5
Commissioning Tests
It is usually sufficient to measure only the optical levels at the transmit and receive ports of I/O cards, transponders, and optical amplifiers installed in each shelf. A good port receive level indicates that the components in the optical path up to that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result is not satisfactory, perform additional measurements at all the other ports along the optical signal paths.
Shelf Power-On Test Procedure

This procedure checks the equipment recovery capability after a power fault. To power on the NE: 1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf. 2. Turn the shelf circuit breaker off. 3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on. The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
Network Commissioning Tests

SDH Commissioning Tests
These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with the system specifications.
Test equipment setup

The SDH tests are performed using an PDH analyzer, optical power meter, and variable attenuators. Configure the optical power meter according to the measured wavelength. The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following sections.
2 Mbps tests
For 2 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows:
Framing Coding Pattern Signal rate Timing Inject error
7-6
Unframed HDB3 2 * 10-15 PRBS 2 Mbps Received clock Code error

Commissioning Tests
34 Mbps tests
Framing Coding Pattern Signal rate Timing Inject error Unframed HDB3 2 * 10-15 PRBS 34 Mbps Received clock Code error
45 Mbps tests
Framing Coding Pattern Signal rate Timing Inject error Unframed 45 frame = C-bit X-bit = 11 2*10-15 PRBS 45 Mbps Received clock Code error
SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type being tested, as follows:
Signal rate Mapping Framing Pattern Timing Inject error STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16 Any mapping (preferably bulk) Off 2 * 10-15 PRBS Received clock Code error
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-7
Commissioning Tests
Network timing synchronization test

This test checks that the XDM-300 NEs synchronize properly and switch to the next priority clock source when a failure occurs.
No. Test procedure Expected results
1.
Define one NE as the internal clock to which all other NEs are synchronized (an external source may also be used). Define several priorities for the timing source. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE serving as the main timing source. If the NE has a single timing source: An alarm is generated for the main timing source. NE timing is set in holdover mode. If the NE has several timing sources: NE timing is synchronized to the second priority timing source. An alarm is generated for the loss of the main timing source.
2. 3.
Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test

This test verifies that the NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification to the management system for viewing.
1. 2.
Create the NEs and links using the management station. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules. A LOS and other alarms generated by the disconnection appear at the SPI level of this module port.
7-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM-300 optical modules is according to specification.
1. 2.
Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst of errors. Connect an optical power meter to Verify that the results are in accordance the first Rx point after the variable with the XDM-300 System optical attenuator and measure the Specifications. total power; the measured optical power level is the input sensitivity of the module.
3.
4.
5.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-9
Commissioning Tests
Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the XDM-300 NEs continue operating properly after a power break, without operator involvement.
1. 2.
Create an unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant trail. Errors and an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) alarm appear in the test equipment. After approximately 7 minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm appears in the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray (no communication).
3.
4.
Power on the NE and wait for it to perform initial download to all cards/modules in the shelf. (This can take 20 minutes.) Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there are no relevant alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.
Traffic stability test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
1. 2.
Create an unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the table below. Verify that no alarms appear in the test You should achieve an error free equipment or at the management station. rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and 1 x 10-12 for all other rates.
3. 4.
7-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Table 7-4: Traffic stability test time intervals 2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/ VC-3 STM-4/VC-12 STM-16/VC-48
14 hours
7 hours
120 min
30 min
8 min
Path protection and nonretrieval test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
1. 2.
Create one protected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Disconnect one of the fibers in the Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec active path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail. Verify that the trail carries traffic properly on the protection path. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail continues using the protection path (non-retrieve mode), and the test equipment indicates no alarm.
3.
4. 5.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-11
Commissioning Tests
MSP test
This test verifies that MSP traffic in the XDM-300 network operates properly when a failure occurs. MSP can be applied in a point-to-point configuration.
1. 2.
Create one unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Disconnect one of the fibers in the Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec active path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path. Reconnect the optical fiber. The trail remains on the protection path.
3.
4. 5.
MS-SPRing test
This test verifies that the MS-SPRing traffic operates properly when a failure occurs. This procedure uses a SAM-16 and an MXC card.
1.
Define the ring as MS-SPRing Node Links - east and west clockwise. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Disconnect one of the fibers in the Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec path of the trail. appear in the test equipment, and the trail switches to the protection path and operates properly. Management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail and LOS alarms related to the disconnected fibers.
2. 3.
4.
7-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
No.
Test procedure
Expected results
5.
Reconnect the optical fiber.
The alarms related to the disconnected fibers clear. After the retrieve time (user-definable), the trail switches back to the main path, and short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment. The trail operates properly.
6.
Switch back to the main path.
IOP hardware protection test

This test verifies that the traffic defined on a card with hardware protection operates properly when a failure occurs.
1.
Using at least one module that has hardware protection, create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. You can use a module that has the trail passing through it (for example, SIM) or ending on it (for example, PIM). Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Extract the protected (working) module. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an alarm on the trail.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that the trail works properly The orange protection LED on the via the protection (standby) relevant TPM lights. module. Reinsert the protected (working) module. After 5 minutes (system default - can be changed), the traffic reverts back to the protected module. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports no alarm on the trail.
5.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-13
Commissioning Tests
Severity assignment test

This test, which is performed on one XDM-300 NE, determines the level of urgency accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm-handling protocol. When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Extract an NVM card from the MXC card. Reinsert the NVM card. Change the severity of the Card out alarm for the NVM card to Minor. Extract the NVM card. Reinsert the NVM card.
The management station displays an NVM Card Out alarm of Major severity. The Card Out alarm on the management station clears.
The management station displays an NVM Card Out alarm of Minor severity. The Card Out alarm on the management station clears.
Transmission alarm handling tests

This test verifies that the XDM-300 NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm notification to the management system, and that the management system displays it properly. This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
1. 2.
Create one unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Disconnect the Tx cable of the test The management station reports a LOS equipment. alarm for the relevant PDH port. Set the test equipment to send an AIS (AIS = on). Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port. The management station reports an AIS alarm for the corresponding port. The management station reports a LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the corresponding port. If ALS is off, the management station reports a far-end optical port MS-RDI or Line-RDI alarm. If ALS is on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS alarm.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
3. 4. 5.
7-14
Commissioning Tests
Maintenance actions tests

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM-300 NEs using the management system. This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
1. 2.
Create one unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint. Using the management station, The PDH test equipment detects an AIS execute a forced AIS on the PDH alarm. port that connects to the test equipment.
3. 4.
MXC redundancy test

This test verifies that the backup MXC operates properly and that the database is not lost when a failure occurs.
1. 2.
Create one unprotected trail at any rate between two NEs. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Select an NE that passes the trail, Neither the test equipment nor the and extract the MXC on slot A management station detects a traffic (upper). alarm, but a Card Out alarm for the MXC appears in the management. After several minutes, the NE disconnects from the management station (turns gray), and then reconnects to the management with the same database (switches to the redundant MXC). The Info windows of both MXCs display the correct status.
3.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-15
Commissioning Tests
Data Network Commissioning Tests

The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and latency tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before frames are lost.
1.
Create two unprotected trails at any rate between two NEs in the network. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE. Configure the test equipment for measurement of throughput and latency in accordance with RFC-2544. Measure throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.
2. 3. 4.
5.
NOTE:
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths. For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured value. The latency test is dependant on the throughput results. For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is 4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2 * VC-12 = 4 Mbps). Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12 = 2.048 Mbps).
7-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Table 7-5: Throughput and latency test results

LAN port & speed 64 bytes/ frame 128 bytes/ frame 256 bytes/ 512 frame bytes/ frame 1024 bytes/ frame 1280 bytes/ frame 1518 bytes/ frame
Throughput Latency
Frame loss rate test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is overloaded.
1.
Create two unprotected trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two NEs. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Configure the test equipment for measurement of frame loss in accordance with RFC-2544. Set for 100%. The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula: [(Input fps) (Output fps)] x 100/(Input fps) Where fps stands for frames per second. Example: At 100 Mbps with 5 VC-12s (10 Mbps), the Input fps is 148810. When the Output fps is 14881, the frame loss is 148810 14881 = 133929, which represents 90% loss.
2. 3.
4.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-17
Commissioning Tests
Table 7-6: Frame loss rate test results Frame size 64 bytes/ 128
frame Frame rate (% MFR) 100% bytes/ frame 256 bytes/ 512 frame bytes/ frame 1024 bytes/ frame 1280 bytes/ frame 1518 bytes/ frame
System recovery and reset tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer overflow condition and from a power failure.
1.
Create two unprotected trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two NEs. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate, and for any frame size. Power off one of the NEs. Turn on the NE and wait for 2 minutes. Verify packet loss in the test equipment. Verify that the errors in the test equipment have cleared.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
7-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Stability test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can function with no errors for a defined period of time.
1.
Create two unprotected trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps or 1 Gbps) between two NEs. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate, and for any frame size. Run this test for 2 hours. Verify that no errors appear in the test equipment.
2. 3.
4.
5.
Alarm handling test

This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and to the optical interfaces.
1.
Create two trails at any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between two NEs. Connect the test equipment to both ports of one NE. Connect a cross cable on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports). Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port. Disconnect the optical cable to create a signal loss to the optical interface. A 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm is generated (only if VLAN is created). An SPI LOS alarm on the optical interface is generated.
2. 3.
4.
5.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-19
Commissioning Tests
Optical Network Commissioning Tests

The optical network commissioning tests verify normal network operation. Perform these tests only after the entire network is complete.
Test setup and required test equipment

Optical network commissioning tests check the performance of transmission paths within the network. To perform these tests, use an optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, variable attenuator, and optical BER tester. Configure the BER tester to operate at the transponder transmission rate (for example, STM-16 when connected to a CTRP25). The following figure shows the test setup for the optical commissioning tests.
Figure 7-1: Optical commissioning tests setup
7-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Optical power measurement test

This test verifies that all optical cards/modules and all optical links are operating according to the optical power budget plan and XDM-300 specifications.
1.
Using an optical power meter, measure the input and output optical levels of each optical component (card, module, and so on). Record the results of all the measurements (Excel file); these results provide the information needed to evaluate the optical budget of the network. Using an optical spectrum analyzer, measure the following parameters for each link: Spectrum of the composite line signal Power per channel OSNR (Optical Signal to Noise Ratio) Gain tilt For this purpose, measure the optical signals at the input and output of each active and passive optical component (optical booster, preamplifier, OADM, MUX, DEMUX, supervisory channel interfaces, and so on).
The measurement results are within the range of minimum and maximum levels specified for each type of optical component (see XDM System Specifications).
2.
The measured levels are within the range expected in accordance with the planned optical network power budget.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-21
Commissioning Tests
Equipment power-on test

This test verifies that the XDM-300 NEs continue operating normally after a power break, without operator involvement.
1. 2.
Select one of the optical paths in the network. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs). Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant optical path. An alarm appears in the test equipment and the management station. After approximately seven minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm appears in the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray (no communication).
3.
4.
Power on the NE and wait for it to Can take up to 20 minutes. perform initial download to all cards in the shelf. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there are no alarms related to the relevant optic path in the test equipment or at the management station.
5.
LOS detection test

This test verifies that the XDM-300 NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm notification to the management system for viewing.
1.
Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the optical modules.
A LOS alarm at the SPI level of this module post appears, together with other alarms caused by the disconnection.
7-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
Input sensitivity test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM-300 optical cards/modules is according to their technical specification.
1. 2.
Select one of the optical transmission paths in the network. Connect the test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs). Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant path. Set the attenuator to 0 dB. Slowly increase the attenuation until the test equipment displays a burst of errors. Connect an optical power meter to The measured optical power level is the the first Rx point after the variable input sensitivity of the card. optical attenuator and measure the total power.
3.
4. 5.
6.
Path protection test

This test verifies that the protected traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
1. 2.
Select one of the protected optical paths in the network. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs). Disconnect one of the optical fibers in the active path of the optical channel. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path. Reconnect the optical fiber. The optical channel remains on the protection path (non-retrieve mode), and no alarm appears in the test equipment. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment and management station.
3.
4.
5.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-23
Commissioning Tests
Maintenance action handling test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM-300 NEs using the management system. This procedure tests a manual switch, forced switch, and switch lockout.
1. 2.
Select one of the protected optical transmission paths in the network. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs). From the management system, perform a manual switch. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from its MUX. From the management system, perform a manual switch. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the main path. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from its DEMUX. From the management station, perform a manual switch. From the management system, perform a switch lockout on the nonactive TRP. Disconnect the line input of the active TRP from its DEMUX. The optical channel does not switch to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in the test equipment. The optical channel switches to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in the test equipment. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment. Short alarm bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10.
11.
7-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Commissioning Tests
BER and stability test

This test verifies that the optical channels in the XDM-300 optical network operate without errors (according to ITU-T standards).
1. 2.
Select one of the protected optical paths in the network. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs). Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the following table. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management station. You should achieve an error free rate of 1 x 10-12.
3.
4.
Table 7-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals Rate STM-1 STM-4 STM-16
Time period
120 min
30 min
8 min
417006-2311-0H3-B00
7-25
Commissioning Tests
7-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8
Maintenance
In this chapter:
Overview ......................................................................................................... 8-1 Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ............................................. 8-1 Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 8-2 Traffic Monitoring System .............................................................................. 8-6 Onsite Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 8-12 Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 8-20 Replacing RAP Components ......................................................................... 8-27
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for XDM-300 equipment.
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials

For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only a Craft terminal and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for commissioning tests (on page 7-1). The tools and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available during maintenance.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-1
Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the XDM-300 hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction. Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the procedures used in your organization.
Table 8-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks Item Inspection/Check Intervals* W M Q
1.
Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to avoid stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection, except as required to correct problems. Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any signs of corrosion. Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as necessary with approved cleaning agents. Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and their power sources. Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by protective covers. Add covers as necessary. Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all extractor handles must be in the storage position (parallel to the card edge), and all module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only manually). Check for proper operation of the FCU300 (no abnormal noise and vibrations) in all NEs. Check that the FCU300 is fully inserted in its chassis position and that its screws are tight. Clean the FCU300 and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace the air filters if necessary. Clean all areas around the shelf in the rack and the rack's front door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner. Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main and backup) to the RAP are properly connected. Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to the RAP. X X X X X
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
X X
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
X X X
8-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Item
Inspection/Check
Intervals* W M Q
13. 14.
Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and modules.
Check that all RAP LEDs turn on and that the buzzer sounds X when the POWER ON pushbutton on the RAP panel is pressed. Note: The buzzer will not sound if the ACO is active. Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel is pressed. Perform a visual check of LED indications. Check the proper operation of the OW system (if applicable to the NE). W weekly M monthly Q quarterly X X X
15. 16. 17.
*Legend:
Air Filter Preventive Maintenance

Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow, and can eventually decrease the airflow below the minimum required for proper cooling of internal components. The resulting increase in the internal temperature of the equipment reduces the equipment reliability and performance. Therefore, whenever an air filter is installed, it must periodically be cleaned or replaced with a clean filter. It is accepted throughout the electronics equipment industry to recommend cleaning or replacing air filters approximately every 90 days. However, the cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental conditions. In dusty environments more frequent cleaning is required. Note that foam filters, which are the type used in XDM platforms, efficiently trap particles without showing face loading of contaminants, and therefore visual inspection cannot be used to determine cleaning intervals. CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must strictly be observed,
as clogging by trapped particles can severely impair equipment reliability and performance.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-3
Maintenance
Recommended Cleaning Methods

The following methods (listed in order of ascending efficiency) can be used to clean air filters: 1. Vacuum clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner remove accumulated dust and dirt in seconds. Point the air nozzle in the direction of operating airflow (vacuum from intake side toward exhaust side). 2. Blow with compressed air: Point a compressed air nozzle in the opposite direction of the operating airflow (blow from the exhaust side toward the intake side). NOTE: Oily residues and moisture reduce cleaning efficiency
of the above methods; in such cases, clean the filter using method No. 4, or replace the filter.
3. Cold water rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used in the filters require no oily adhesives. Therefore, collected dust and dirt can be washed away using a standard hose nozzle with plain water. Stand the filter until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service. 4. Immersion in warm soapy water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is present, the filter may be dipped in a solution of warm water and mild detergent. Then simply rinse in clear water, stand until completely dry and free of moisture, and return to service. The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types of contaminants under any reasonable service conditions.
8-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Cleaning the air filter

For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.
Figure 8-1: Inserting the air filter
NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while the
XDM-300 shelf is in operation.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-5
Maintenance
To clean the air filter: 1. Release the two thumbnuts fastening the filter in the upmost position. 2. Lower the filter frame and pull the filter out. 3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage (for example, holes or torn material) is evident, replace the filter with a new one. CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original
type. Failure to do so can impair equipment reliability and performance.
4. Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization. 5. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by the two coding tabs. 6. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame, lift the thumbnuts and fasten them in place.
Traffic Monitoring System

Principles of Operation
The XDM-300 incorporates a traffic monitoring system that enables rapid allocation of major problems in the traffic passing through its aggregate and I/O modules. The XDM-300 monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through the I/O modules installed in slots I1 to I16 of the modules cages. NOTE: I/O CWDM modules installed in the modules cage
slots are not supported by the monitoring system.
8-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
The main components of the monitoring system interface are located on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F front panel. These components, except for the monitoring point and monitoring indicator, are common to all modules. In addition, the system has a monitoring point and monitoring indicators on the front panel of the modules. The PIM2_21, PIM2_63/B, and PIM345 have only one monitoring indicator used for all their channels. STM-1 modules do not have a monitoring point, and use the monitoring point on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F card.
Figure 8-2: ECU300/ECU300-F-F monitoring system interface
The system's common components on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F are as follows:

MODULE selector CHANNEL selector MODULE, 2-digit display CHANNEL, 2-digit display STM-1 MON monitoring point MON indicator
The ECU300/ECU300-F-F components that serve only STM-1 modules are:

417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-7
Maintenance
The monitoring system components on the monitored modules include:

MON monitoring point MON indicators
Figure 8-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module
The monitoring system enables you to monitor traffic passing through a module. To do so, test equipment is connected to the monitoring point of the corresponding module, and the module and port are selected by the system's selectors. As a result, the traffic is closed through the test equipment and the signal can be viewed, in an eye pattern, on the test equipment display.
Selecting a module
The MODULE selector chooses the monitored module slot number. The selected module is displayed on the 2-digit display to the right of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the slot number; pressing it downward decrements the slot number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are QA and QB for the aggregate cards (I/O cards), and I1 to I16 for the I/O modules. If the selected module is an STM-1, the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F lights.
Selecting a channel
The CHANNEL selector chooses the specific monitored channel (port) on the module selected. The selected channel is displayed on the 2-digit display to the left of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the channel number; pressing it downward decrements the channel number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are from 00 to the module's maximum number of channels. For example, in a PIM2_21 (which has 21 ports), the selection goes from 00 to 21. When the value 00 is selected, the system blocks the monitoring to the selected module. In addition to the number of the selected channel shown on the display, a MON indicator lights near the selected port on the module. If an STM-1 module is selected, the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F lights in addition to the LED near the selected port on the module.
8-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Stabilization time
The monitoring system has a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 seconds. This means that after a new value is selected with the MODULE or CHANNEL selectors, the display starts blinking for the stabilization time, and only after that the new selection is displayed.
Response to events
This section describes the response of the monitoring system to the following events:

Power-on Cold restart MXC300 switching to redundancy Warm restart ECU300/ECU300-F-F extraction/insertion
After power-on, the monitoring system displays 17 00. This is the default state, and indicates slot QA and channel 00. Channel 00 is defined in the system as idle state, and indicates that no channel was selected and that monitoring is disabled. To enable the monitoring results, a module and a channel must be selected. The response of the system to MXC300 switching to redundancy is identical to the response to cold restart. Warm restart does not affect the traffic or monitoring of any modules in the XDM-300. After extracting/inserting the ECU300/ECU300-F-F, the monitoring display is reset to the default state 17 00, and the monitoring history stored in the ECU300/ECU300-F-F's memory is lost.
Assigning modules to slots

To monitor a module installed in a specific slot, the management system must have previously assigned that module to the slot. If the module was not assigned, the CHANNEL display will indicate 00 and remain in this state, even if you attempt to change the selection. If a module in a slot is replaced with a module of the same type, the display will not change and the system will read the monitoring result for the channel that was last selected. If a module has to be replaced with a module of a different type, the new module must be assigned to the slot. Then, a new MODULE and CHANNEL selection must be made.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-9
Maintenance
Monitoring options
The system can monitor a number of channels in different modules simultaneously. This feature is useful when traffic passing through different modules in the XDM-300 has to be analyzed. After monitoring channels of different modules, all selected channel numbers of these modules are saved in the ECU300/ECU300-F-F's memory. You can connect test equipment to various modules or connect test equipment with multiple inputs to simultaneously monitor the traffic passing through the channels in these modules.
Monitoring Signal Levels

The following table lists the normal signal levels at the monitoring points for the various modules.
Table 8-2: I/O modules monitoring data Module type Monitoring point Number of channels (ports)
4 4 8 2 4 21 63 3
Signal rate and level
SIM1_4/O SIM1_4/OB SIM1_4/E SIM1_8 SIM4_2 SIM4_4 PIM2_21 PIM2_63/B PIM345_3
ECU300/ECU300-F -F front panel ECU300/ECU300-F -F front panel ECU300/ECU300-F -F front panel Module front panel Module front panel Module front panel Module front panel Module front panel
155 Mbps, CMI 155 Mbps, CMI 155 Mbps, CMI 622 Mbps, NRZ 622 Mbps, NRZ 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3 34 or 45 Mbps, HDB-3
8-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Monitoring Modules Traffic

Monitoring the traffic of STM-1 and other modules operating at a different rate is similar, and differs only in the location of the monitoring point and LED indicators. To monitor the traffic in a non-STM-1 module: 1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored. 2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point. 3. Select the slot number of the monitored module using the MODULE selector. 4. Select the channel number of the monitored port using the CHANNEL selector. 5. Wait for the display to stabilize (stop blinking), and then verify that the required slot and channel were selected. 6. Verify that the MON indicator of the selected channel lights. 7. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring point. To monitor the traffic in an STM-1 module: 1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored. 2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F card. 3. Perform Steps 3 to 5 in the previous section. 4. Verify that the MON indicator on the ECU300/ECU300-F-F card and the corresponding MON indicator on the STM-1 module light. 5. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring point.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-11
Maintenance
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible. Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following conditions:

Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station. Alarm or malfunction detected on site by maintenance personnel, either as a result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available on the XDM-300 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the XDM-300, with SDH, data, and CWDM equipment, and with the LightSoft and EMS-XDM management stations. Refer to the respective user manuals for details on the various capabilities of the management stations, and for instructions on performing the desired activities. The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite troubleshooting for various trouble categories, as well as for specific subsystems, for example, OADMs, Mux/DeMux subsystems, and so on. For each category, you will find a troubleshooting table that provides the instructions for identifying the trouble. To use the troubleshooting table: 1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under Symptoms. 2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under Corrective actions in the order in which they appear until the trouble is corrected.
8-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Power Problems

Table 8-3: Troubleshooting power problems
No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions
RAP POWER ON indicator is off.
Both main and backup power sources failed.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Check the site power distribution system. Check the DC voltage at the main and backup power terminals of the RAP. If the voltage is not within the correct range, check cable connections up to the DC power distribution panel, and make sure no fuses are blown. Check the voltage supplied by the main and backup power sources. Check the power connections to the RAP. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary. Check the voltage at the MXC300 end of each power cable. Replace the cable or repair the RAP if there is no voltage present. If after checking (as explained above) and reconnecting a cable to the equipment, the circuit breaker trips again, replace the corresponding MXC300 card. If the problem occurs again after Step 2, remove all the cards and modules from the shelf and reinsert them one by one until you find the component causing the circuit breaker to trip. Replace that component Check the corresponding circuit breaker in the RAP; reset any tripped breaker. Check the circuit breakers in the RAP and replace if necessary. If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect the cable protected by the corresponding circuit breaker from the equipment and check the voltage polarity. Check the power cable condition and make sure that the cable is not damaged and does not cause short circuits. Check proper cable connection at both ends.
Equipment problem.
1. 2.
3.
MXC300 ACTIVE indicator is off.
No input power to the corresponding unit.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
MXC300 FAIL indicator lights.
Technical failure in the corresponding unit.
Replace the unit.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-13
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators

The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of suspected components. Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators. These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with the procedures outlined in the following tables. NOTE: See description of indicator functions in the XDM-100 Product Line Reference Manual. CAUTION: The following corrective actions are
traffic-affecting.
Table 8-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules

Green ACT/AC indicator is off.
Defective indicator Defective card/module
Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F, and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module. 1. 2. Remove the card/module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card or module in its slot. If the ACT/AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the card/module. Remove the card/module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it. Make sure the ACT/AC indicator turns on after the card/module is reinserted. The FAIL/FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the card/module. Wait until the software download is complete and check that the FAIL/FL indicator turns off. If the FAIL/FL indicator turns on again, replace the card/module.
Defective Red FAIL/FL indicator does not card/module turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting). Card/module Orange (traffic not configured carrying) to carry traffic indicator is off when indicator is supported.
1. 2.
3.
Check with the management station operator if the card/module has already been configured and provisioned; if not, ignore the state of the orange indicator.
CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an
OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so may damage the receiver irreparably.
8-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Table 8-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

Green transceiver The corresponding state indicator is optical transmitter off. may have been turned off by the ALS function (see note below).
1. 2.
3. 2 Transceiver state Test equipment is indicator lights in connected to the red. monitoring connector of the corresponding plug-in. Defective transceiver. 1.
When available, press the laser-on pushbutton of the ECU300/ECU300-F to activate the corresponding laser. If the problem persists, the laser automatically turns off again after a few seconds. Check that all the fibers are properly connected to the corresponding optical transceiver. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected after the transceiver is reinserted. For plug-in transceivers with monitoring connector: the test equipment is connected to the monitoring connector. This indication is provided for identification purposes, and does not necessarily indicate a malfunction. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver and remove it. Reinstall the transceiver in its position, making sure to fully engage its connector to the mating card connector. Replace the transceiver if the problem is not corrected after the transceiver is reinserted.
1. 2. 3.
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its
transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost. Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network and generates a large number of alarms. As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the problem, and you may need to use the management station log records to identify the port.
Table 8-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules

Green AC indicator is off.
Defective indicator Defective module
Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the ECU300/ECU300-F and check that the indicator lights. If not, replace the card/module. 1. 2. Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the module. Remove the module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns on after the module is reinserted. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the module. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
Defective module Red FL indicator does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).
1. 2. 3.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-15
Maintenance
Table 8-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and Mux/DeMux

Defective module
1. 2.
Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the module in its slot. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the module. Remove the module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns on after the module is reinserted. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the component. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
Defective module Red FL indicator does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting).
1. 2. 3.
Table 8-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISMs

Defective module
1. 2.
Remove the module and wait a minute before reinserting it. Make sure that you fully insert the card in its slot. If the AC indicator does not turn on after reinsertion, replace the module. Remove the module and wait a few minutes before reinserting it to reset. Make sure the AC indicator turns on after the module is reinserted. The FL indicator must flash while software is downloaded to the module. Wait until the software download ends and check that the FL indicator turns off. If the FL indicator turns on again, replace the module.
Red FL indicator on the module does not turn off after software download (this occurs after power-on and resetting). Orange (traffic carrying) indicator on module is off.
Defective module
1. 2. 3.
Module not configured to carry traffic
Check with the management station operator whether the module has already been configured and provisioned; if not, ignore the state of the orange indicator. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. Check port configuration. Check connections to LAN. Make sure at least one LAN station is active. Replace optical transceiver of port. Check port configuration. Check connections to LAN. Make sure at least one LAN station is active.
Green (link state) Problem related to port indicator of an Ethernet optical port is off. Link state indicator of an 10/100BaseT Ethernet port is off. Problem related to port
8-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem

Table 8-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem
Switching to standby TMU
Technical failure Missing T3/BITS IN external reference signal
Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300, and then replace the MXC300 card with the defective TMU. 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the equipment providing the external reference signal and make sure it operates normally. Check the cable connected to the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F connector. Make sure both its ends are properly connected to the mating connector. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in doubt. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F. Check the cable connected to the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F connector. Make sure both its ends are properly connected to the mating connector. Check the cable wiring. Replace the cable if in doubt. Replace the corresponding ECU300/ECU300-F. Force switching of traffic to the other MXC300, and then replace the MXC300 with the defective TMU.
Missing T4/BITS OUT external reference signal
1. 2. 3. 4.
Loss of reference Troubleshoot the corresponding module and replace it if clock source provided found faulty. by a tributary
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-17
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic Alarms

Before any other troubleshooting activity, check the management station log to check if a specific component has been reported as faulty and replace it. CAUTION: Before checking fiber break problems using an
OTDR (Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer), it is the user's responsibility to disconnect the receiver port. Failure to do so may damage the receiver irreparably.
Table 8-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms

Alarm related to External problem a client signal
1. 2.
Check the proper operation of the equipment providing the tributary signal and its connections to the XDM-300 I/O port. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on). Check the proper operation of the equipment providing the line signal and its connections to the XDM-300 port. Use the network and site documentation to identify the path associated with the reported alarm and all related optical and/or electrical components. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points through the management. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).
Alarm related to External problem a line signal
1. 2.
3.
8-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Troubleshooting Management Communication

When the management station cannot manage an XDM-300 shelf, use the following table to identify the cause of the problem. NOTE: Whenever you detect problems during commissioning
tests and when troubleshooting a new installation, do not overlook the possibility of configuration and/or provisioning errors. Under such circumstances, always start the troubleshooting procedures by reviewing all equipment configuration and provisioning parameters against the original network design, and correct as necessary.
Table 8-11: Troubleshooting management communication
Problems in management traffic path
Defective card/module in management traffic path
1.
Check for fault indications on the cards processing the management communication (see General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules (on page 8-14)). 2. Force switching to the protection path and reset each component. Use the results of the BIT test to identify the faulty component. Use the network and site documentation to identify the path of the management communication to the corresponding XDM shelf and all the related optical components. Use the results of the commissioning tests as a reference for the required signal levels, and make measurements of current levels at all the relevant monitoring points through the management. Compare the reference levels with the measured values; a significant discrepancy may point to the failed component (for example, low transmit level, excessive fiber attenuation due to physical damage, and so on).
Problem in transmission path
1.
2.
3.
Other problems
Replace suspected components in the following sequence: 1. Hubs and Ethernet cables used for management traffic 2. ECU300/ECU300-F 3. MXC300
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-19
Maintenance
Replacing Cards and Modules

Safety and Workmanship
Refer to Before You Start/Safety Guidelines (on page 1-1) for safety and workmanship instructions. CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED XDM-300 equipment contains components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage, strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against ESD. Keep parts and cards in their antistatic packaging material until you are ready to install them. Use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or rack when handling cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection to internal connectors.
Before you start: When inserting cards and modules, make sure to carefully align the card or module with the shelf guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract the card/module and then repeat the process. Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent cards/modules. Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and modules. Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent connector pins.
8-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical transceiver: 1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged during shipment. 2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any problems. 3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the component to be replaced. After replacing a component: 1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it. 2. Attach a report to the package explaining the reason for the replacement, and identify the network site, physical location, shelf, and time of replacement.
Replacing MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the MXC300. CAUTION:
Do not extract/insert an MXC300 while the DC cables are connected to it. If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC300 is not mounted correctly or not all four screws are properly locked. Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM (yellow) indicator; remove the card only after this indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-21
Maintenance
To replace the MXC300: 1. Initiate a forced switching to the other MXC300. 2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 to be replaced turns off and remains off for at least 2 minutes, and then remove the NVM card as described in Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards. It is recommended to wait until the yellow indicator of the other MXC300 card also turns off. CAUTION: When replacing any MXC300 card, the upper left
screw operates a microswitch. When this screw is open, it indicates to the XDM-300 platform that the MXC300 is not installed. This screw must be opened first when replacing an MXC300 card.
3. Open the MXC300 upper left screw first, then the upper right screw, and then the two lower screws. 4. Hold both extractor handles and pull them simultaneously outward until the card is released from the backplane. 5. Keep holding the handles, and gently pull the card out of the shelf. 6. If necessary, transfer the NVM from the replaced MXC300 card to its replacement (see Replacing the NVM on MXC300 cards). 7. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card guides. 8. Push the cards front panel with both hands until the extractor handles attach to the panel. 9. Push the card in by holding both handles and pushing them simultaneously inward, until the card mates the chassis connectors and is locked in place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 10. Close the cards upper left screws first, then the upper right screw, and then the two lower screws. NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC300 are
properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in improper operation of the shelf. If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs blink simultaneously, the MXC is not mounted correctly or not all four screws are properly locked.
8-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Replacing the NVM on MXC300 Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the NVM. CAUTION: To prevent disruption of data stored on the NVM,
make sure you do not open the NVM cover while the MXC300 accesses the NVM. Before attempting to remove the NVM, monitor the NVM (yellow) indicator; open the NVM cover only after the NVM indicator on the MXC300 has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the NVM: 1. Force switch to the other MXC300. 2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC300 on which the NVM is to be replaced turns off, and remains off for at least 2 minutes. 3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the MXC300. 4. Press the NVM release pushbutton, using the NVM cover edge as an extractor tool. 5. Carefully extract the NVM from the MXC300. 6. Orient the replacement NVM in the correct position and push it straight into its socket. 7. Replace the NVM's cover, and fasten it to the MXC300 with its two captive screws. At this stage, you may either wait for the automatic updating of the database stored on the new NVM (this may take up to one hour), or immediately force a switching to the MXC300 on which the NVM has been replaced.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-23
Maintenance
Replacing ECU300/ECU300-F Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the ECU300/ECU300-F. CAUTION: Replace the ECU300/ECU300-F card as rapidly
as possible. While the ECU300/ECU300-F card is out, management, debugging, T3/T4 synchronization, and other tasks supported by this card are not possible. Before attempting to remove the card, monitor the NVM (yellow) and TMU (orange) indicators of the MXC300 installed in the shelf; remove the ECU300/ECU300-F only after the MXC300 indicators have been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the ECU300/ECU300-F: 1. Mark each cable connected to the card for identification purposes. 2. Disconnect the cables connected to the ECU300/ECU300-F. 3. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the shelf. 4. Remove the card to be replaced by pulling its handle. 5. Insert the rear end of the replacement card in the corresponding card guides. 6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure. 7. Fasten the card to the shelf by its two captive screws. 8. Reconnect the cables disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement card.
8-24
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Replacing I/O Modules

The following procedure is applicable to all I/O modules. Before you start: For modules with electrical interfaces that use electrical interface protection via TPMs, first force a switch to the protection module (IOP) before replacing the module. To replace I/O modules: 1. Mark each cable and fiber connected to the module for identification purposes. 2. Disconnect any cables or fibers connected to the module to be replaced. 3. Open the captive screws fastening the module to the shelf. 4. Remove the module to be replaced by pulling its handle. 5. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding module guides. 6. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat the procedure. 7. Fasten the module to the shelf by its captive screws. 8. Reconnect any cables or fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement module.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-25
Maintenance
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers

ECI Telecom's Network Solutions Division supplies field-replaceable SFP/XFP transceivers. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety precautions described in Laser Device Operating Precautions during the replacement. To replace an SFP/XFP transceiver: 1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes. 2. Identify the position of the SFP/XFP transceiver to be replaced. 3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver. 4. Remove the transceiver plug-in by pulling its tab. 5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver clicks into place (see the following figure). If you feel resistance before the transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the insertion.
Figure 8-4: Inserting an SFP/XFP transceiver into an I/O module
6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.
8-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Replacing the FCU300

The FCU300 can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the XDM-300 shelf. CAUTION: To prevent the shelf overheating, complete the
replacement within 2 to 3 minutes.
To replace the FCU300: 1. Prepare the replacement FCU300 so you can install it immediately after removing the old FCU300. In particular, carefully inspect the interior of the FCU300 to ensure that no foreign matter, for example, packaging chips, is present inside the unit. 2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCU300 to the shelf. 3. Carefully remove the FCU300 to be replaced by slowly pulling it out of the shelf. Be aware that the internal fans may still be rotating. 4. Insert the replacement FCU300 in the corresponding shelf guides, and push it carefully in until the FCU300 fully engages the mating internal connector of the XDM-300 shelf. Make sure that the FCU300 front panel is flush with the shelf frame front edges. As the FCU300 is plugged into its mating connector, the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on. 5. Fasten the FCU300 to the shelf by its two captive screws.
Replacing RAP Components

This section provides instructions for replacing RAP components identified as faulty via the troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-27
Maintenance
Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers

xRAP-100 circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping). To replace the xRAP-100 circuit breakers: 1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure). 2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket. 3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker. WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with a fuse of the same type and rating. ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection contre les risques dincendie, remplacer par un fusible de mme type et de mmes caractristiques nominales.
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding xRAP-100 power terminal board, as shown in the following figure. 5. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
8-28
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Maintenance
Figure 8-5: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers
Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers

xRAP-D circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot swapping). To replace the xRAP-D circuit breakers: 1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-D front cover to its chassis and remove the cover (see the following figure). 2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of its socket. 3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced circuit breaker. WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire, ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromettre la protection contre les risques dincendie, remplacer par un fusible de mme type et de mmes caractristiques nominales.
replace only with a circuit breaker of the same type and rating.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
8-29
Maintenance
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the corresponding xRAP-D power terminal board, as shown in the following figures. 5. Reinstall the xRAP-D front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
Figure 8-6: Installation of xRAP-D circuit breakers
8-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A
Connector Pin Assignments
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ A-1 ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors............................................................ A-2 MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors ........................................................... A-9 PIM2_21 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-10 PIM2_42 Connection Data ........................................................................... A-13 PIM2_63/B Connection Data ....................................................................... A-19 PIM2_63S Connection Data ......................................................................... A-23 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors .............................................................. A-31 ACP100 Connectors ..................................................................................... A-32 xRAP-100 Connectors .................................................................................. A-33 RAP-4B Connectors ..................................................................................... A-38 xRAP-D Connectors ..................................................................................... A-42
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in XDM shelves and associated ancillary equipment supplied by ECI Telecom. Optical and coaxial connectors are described in the XDM-1000 Product Line Reference Manual. Any connectors not described in this appendix are reserved for use by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division technical support personnel and/or for future expansion, and therefore no user equipment may be connected to them.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-1
ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors

ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a 36-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines:
Five external alarm input lines referenced to an internal power supply common line (the power supplys common line is floating relative to the chassis ground). The alarm input lines are monitored by the XDM-300 management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an optocoupler. Three external alarm outputs/inputs. Each output is provided by three relay dry contacts. These lines can be configured as additional alarm inputs by the systems management. Four severity alarm outputs and a buzzer control line. Each output is provided by three relay dry contacts. The buzzer control line is provided by two dry contacts.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state and 1A in closed state. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector.
Figure A-1: ALARMS connector pin identification
The ALARMS connector can be connected in several configurations to the customers alarm collecting facility. It can be connected directly to the customers distribution frame or via xRAP or xRAP-100 rack alarm panels to the customers facility. ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division offers appropriate cables for each of the configurations. These cables are described in the sections that follow.
A-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Table A-1: ALARMS connector pin assignment

Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction
COMMON_F
Floating Input power supply common Alarm input 1, + wire Alarm input 1, wire Alarm input 2, + wire Alarm input 2, wire Alarm input 3, + wire Alarm input 3, wire Alarm input 4, + wire Alarm input 4, wire Alarm input 5, + wire Alarm input 5, wire Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
19
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm NC Critical alarm NO Critical alarm common Major alarm NC Major alarm common Major alarm NO Minor alarm NC Minor alarm NO Minor alarm common Warning alarm NC Warning alarm common Warning alarm NO Alarm output 3 common/ input 8, wire Alarm output 3 common/ input 8, + wire Alarm output 3 NC External alarm sense 2
Output
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ALM_IP1 ALM_IN1 ALM_IP2 ALM_IN2 ALM_IP3 ALM_IN3 ALM_IP4 ALM_IN4 ALM_IP5 ALM_IN5 ALM_O1NO/ IN6 ALM_O1/IP6
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
CRIT_NO CRIT_COM MAJ_NC MAJ_COM MAJ_NO MIN_NC MIN_NO MIN_COM WARN_NC WARN_COM WARN_NO
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Alarm output Output/ 1 NO/input Input 6, wire Alarm output Output/ Input 1 common/ input 6, + wire Alarm output Output 1 NC Alarm output Output/ 2 NO/input Input 7, wire Alarm output Output/ Input 2 common/ input 7, + wire Alarm output Output 2 NC Buzzer common Input
13
31
ALM_O3NO/ IN8
Output/ Input
14
ALM_O1NC
32
ALM_O3/IP8
Output/ Input Output
15
ALM_O2NO/ IN7 ALM_O2/IP7
33
ALM_O3NC
16
34
EXTA_SN2
Input
17 18
ALM_O2NC BUZ_COM
35 36
BUZ_NO EXTA_SN1
Audio alarm activation line External alarm sense 1
Input Input
NOTE: Alarm outputs of ALM_01NO/IN6, ALM_O1/IP6,

ALM_O2NO/IN7, ALM_O2/IP7, ALM_O3NO/IN8, and ALM_O3/IP8 can be configured as alarm inputs by system management.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-3
Alarms client cable

This cable provides a direct connection between the XDM-300 and the customers distribution frame. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on one end which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open wires for connecting to the customers facility on the other end. The following table lists the pin assignment in the SCSI connector and the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin for the connection between the XDM-300 ALARMS connector and a distribution frame.
Table A-2: ALARMS client cable wiring
Pin Name Function Direction Wire color
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
COMMON_F ALM_IN1 ALM_IN2 ALM_IN3 ALM_IN4 ALM_IN5 ALM_O1NO/ IN6 ALM_O1/IP6 ALM_O1NC ALM_O2NO/ IN7 ALM_O2/IP7 ALM_O2NC BUZ_COM CRIT_NC CRIT_NO CRIT_COM MAJ_NC MAJ_COM MAJ_NO MIN_NC MIN_NO
Floating power supply common Not connected Alarm input 1, wire Not connected Alarm input 2, wire Not connected Alarm input 3, wire Not connected Alarm input 4, wire Not connected Alarm input 5, wire
Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown Brown/gray-ring Red Red/gray-ring Orange Orange/gray-ring Yellow Yellow/gray-ring Green Green/gray-ring Blue Blue/gray-ring Violet White White/gray-ring Pink Pink/gray-ring Brown/white-ring Red/white-ring Orange/white-ring Yellow/white-ring
Alarm output 1 NO/input 6, Output/Input wire Alarm output 1 common/input 6, + wire Alarm output 1 NC Alarm output 2 NO/input 7, wire Alarm output 2 common/input 7, + wire Alarm output 2 NC Buzzer common Critical alarm NC Critical alarm NO Critical alarm common Major alarm NC Major alarm common Major alarm NO Minor alarm NC Minor alarm NO Input Input Input Input Output/ Input Output Output/ Input Output/ Input Output Input Input Input
A-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Pin Name Function
Direction
Wire color
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MIN_COM WARN_NC WARN_COM WARN_NO ALM_O3NO/ IN8 ALM_O3/IP8 ALM_O3NC EXTA_SN2 BUZ_NO EXTA_SN1
Minor alarm common Warning alarm NC Warning alarm common Warning alarm NO Alarm output 3 common/input 8, wire Alarm output 3 common/input 8, + wire Alarm output 3 NC External alarm sense 2 Audio alarm activation line External alarm sense 1
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Green/white-ring Blue/white-ring Violet/white-ring Light gray/ white-ring Red/brown-ring Yellow/brown-ring Orange/brown-ring Violet/gray-ring
xRAP-100 alarms cable

This cable connects the XDM-300 to the xRAP-100. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on both ends; one connects to the XDM-300 ALARMS connector, and the other to the xRAP-100 ALARMS connector. The following table lists the xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring.
Table A-3: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring XDM-300 side SCSI connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name COMMON_F ALM_IP1 ALM_IN1 ALM_IP2 ALM_IN2 ALM_IP3 ALM_IN3 ALM_IP4 ALM_IN4 ALM_IP5 ALM_IN5 ALM_O1NO/IN6 ALM_O1/IP6 ALM_O1NC Function Floating power supply common Alarm input 1, + wire Alarm input 1, wire Alarm input 2, + wire Alarm input 2, wire Alarm input 3, + wire Alarm input 3, wire Alarm input 4, + wire Alarm input 4, wire Alarm input 5, + wire Alarm input 5, wire xRAP-100 side SCSI connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Alarm output 1 NO/input 12 6, wire Alarm output 1 common/input 6, + wire Alarm output 1 NC 13 14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-5
XDM-300 side SCSI connector 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Name ALM_O2NO/IN7 ALM_O2/IP7 ALM_O2NC BUZ_COM CRIT_NC CRIT_NO CRIT_COM MAJ_NC MAJ_COM MAJ_NO MIN_NC MIN_NO MIN_COM WARN_NC WARN_COM WARN_NO ALM_O3NO/IN8 ALM_O3/IP8 ALM_O3NC EXTA_SN2 BUZ_NO EXTA_SN1
Function
xRAP-100 side SCSI connector
Alarm output 2 NO/input 15 7, wire Alarm output 2 common/input 7, + wire Alarm output 2 NC Buzzer common Critical alarm NC Critical alarm NO Critical alarm common Major alarm NC Major alarm common Major alarm NO Minor alarm NC Minor alarm NO Minor alarm common Warning alarm NC Warning alarm common Warning alarm NO Alarm output 3 common/input 8, wire Alarm output 3 common/input 8, + wire Alarm output 3 NC External alarm sense 2 Audio alarm activation line External alarm sense 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
F-CHANNEL Connector
The F-CHANNEL connector is a 9-pin D-type male connector that provides a serial RS-232 communication channel supporting SLIP. This connector is intended for connection to a Craft terminal. The connection is made to one of the serial RS-232 ports of the PC serving as a Craft terminal, using a crossed cable. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the connector pin assignment, together with the corresponding pin in the Craft terminal serial RS-232 port (assuming that this port uses a 9-pin connector).
Figure A-2: F-CHANNEL connector pin identification Table A-4: F-CHANNEL connector pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction Craft terminal serial port pin
1 2 3 4 5 6, 7, 8, 9
COM-F-RX COM-F-TX GND
Not connected F-channel receive F-channel transmit Not connected Ground Not connected
Input Output
Not connected Pin 3 (transmit output) Pin 2 (receive input) Not connected Pin 5 (ground) Not connected
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors

The T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors are 9-pin D-type male connectors, each including two groups of lines:

Clock input (T3 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface) Clock output (T4 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
The MAIN connector serves the main TMU, and the PROTECT connector serves the standby (protection) TMU. They are connected to the site timing reference distribution subsystem. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector, and the table lists their pin assignment.
Figure A-3: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin identification
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-7
Table A-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors pin assignment

Pin Name Function Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SHIELD CK_2M_MIL SHIELD CK_2M_MOL CK_2M_MIH SHIELD CK_2M_MOH
Shield Clock input, low Shield Clock output, low Not connected Clock input, high Shield Clock output, high Not connected
Input Output Input Output -
ETHERNET Connectors
The two ETHERNET connectors located on the ECU300/ECU300-F panel, designated MANAGEMENT MAIN and PROT/LCT, are 8-pin RJ-45 connectors that provide two Ethernet 10BaseT management interfaces (one for each MXC300 card installed in the XDM-300 shelf). At any time, only the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the current main card is active; the interface connected to the MXC300 serving as the protection card is in standby to provide protection for the out-of-band management traffic. Each ETHERNET connector is wired as a station port intended for direct connection through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-4: ETHERNET connectors pin identification
A-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Table A-6: ETHERNET connectors pin assignment

Designation Function Direction
TX+ TX RX+ N/C RX FGND N/C
Transmit, + wire Transmit, wire Receive, + wire Not connected Receive, wire Frame ground Not connected
Output Output Input Input
MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors

The DC input power connector, designated POWER, is a 5-pin D-type male connector located on the MXC300 panel. The following figure identifies the functions of the POWER connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-5: POWER input power connector pin functions
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-9
PIM2_21 Connection Data

The PIM2_21 provides 21 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 50-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the E1 receive signals and the lower connector serves the E1 transmit signals. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-6: PIM2_21 E1 connectors pin identification Table A-7: PIM2_21 receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A-10
RTIP1 RTIP2 RTIP3 RTIP4 RTIP5 RTIP6 RTIP7 GND RTIP8 RTIP9 RTIP10 RTIP11 RTIP12 RTIP13 RTIP14 GND
Receive, tributary 1, wire A Receive, tributary 2, wire A Receive, tributary 3, wire A Receive, tributary 4, wire A Receive, tributary 5, wire A Receive, tributary 6, wire A Receive, tributary 7, wire A Shield Receive, tributary 8, wire A Receive, tributary 9, wire A Receive, tributary 10, wire A Receive, tributary 11, wire A Receive, tributary 12, wire A Receive, tributary 13, wire A Receive, tributary 14, wire A Shield
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Violet Brown/green-ring White Pink Brown/white-ring Orange/white-ring Green/white-ring Violet/white-ring Red/brown-ring Light-gray/green-ring
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
RTIP15 RTIP16 RTIP17 RTIP18 RTIP19 RTIP20 RTIP21 GND GND RRING1 RRING2 RRING3 RRING4 RRING5 RRING6 RRING7 GND RRING8 RRING9 RRING10 RRING11 RRING12 RRING13 RRING14 GND RRING15 RRING16 RRING17 RRING18 RRING19 RRING20 RRING21 GND
Receive, tributary 15, wire A Receive, tributary 16, wire A Receive, tributary 17, wire A Receive, tributary 18, wire A Receive, tributary 19, wire A Receive, tributary 20, wire A Receive, tributary 21, wire A Shield Not connected Shield Receive, tributary 1, wire B Receive, tributary 2, wire B Receive, tributary 3, wire B Receive, tributary 4, wire B Receive, tributary 5, wire B Receive, tributary 6, wire B Receive, tributary 7, wire B Shield Receive, tributary 8, wire B Receive, tributary 9, wire B Receive, tributary 10, wire B Receive, tributary 11, wire B Receive, tributary 12, wire B Receive, tributary 13, wire B Receive, tributary 14, wire B Shield Receive, tributary 15, wire B Receive, tributary 16, wire B Receive, tributary 17, wire B Receive, tributary 18, wire B Receive, tributary 19, wire B Receive, tributary 20, wire B Receive, tributary 21, wire B Shield
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Orange/brown-ring Blue/brown-ring Light-gray/brown-ring Brown/red-ring Yellow/red-ring Blue/red-ring White/red-ring Yellow/green-ring Orange/green-ring Brown/gray-ring Red/gray-ring Orange/gray-ring Yellow/gray-ring Green/gray-ring Blue/gray-ring Violet/gray-ring Violet/green-ring White/gray-ring Pink/gray-ring Red/white-ring Yellow/white-ring Blue/white-ring Light-gray/white-ring Yellow/brown-ring Blue/green-ring Green/brown-ring Violet/brown-ring Pink/brown-ring Light-gray/red-ring Green/red-ring Violet/red-ring Pink/red-ring Pink/green-ring
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-11
Table A-8: PIM2_21 transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
TTIP1 TTIP2 TTIP3 TTIP4 TTIP5 TTIP6 TTIP7 GND TTIP8 TTIP9 TTIP10 TTIP11 TTIP12 TTIP13 TTIP14 GND TTIP15 TTIP16 TTIP17 TTIP18 TTIP19 TTIP20 TTIP21 GND GND TRING1 TRING2 TRING3 TRING4 TRING5 TRING6 TRING7 GND TRING8 TRING9 TRING10 TRING11
Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Shield Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Shield Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Shield Not connected Shield Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Shield Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Transmit, tributary 11, wire B
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Brown/yellow-ring Orange/yellow-ring Blue/yellow-ring Light-gray/yellow-ring Brown/blue-ring Orange/blue-ring Green/blue-ring Pink/orange-ring Light-gray/blue-ring Brown/orange-ring Yellow/orange-ring Blue/orange-ring Light-gray/orange-ring Brown/violet-ring Orange/violet-ring Pink/blue-ring Green/violet-ring Light-gray/violet-ring Brown/pink-ring Orange/pink-ring Green/pink-ring Light-gray/pink-ring Pink/violet-ring Pink/white-ring White/brown-ring Red/yellow-ring Green/yellow-ring Violet/yellow-ring White/yellow-ring Red/blue-ring Yellow/blue-ring Violet/blue-ring Black White/blue-ring Red/orange-ring Green/orange-ring Violet/orange-ring
A-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
TRING12 TRING13 TRING14 GND TRING15 TRING16 TRING17 TRING18 TRING19 TRING20 TRING21 GND
Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Shield Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Shield
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
White/orange-ring Red/violet-ring Yellow/violet-ring Black/white-ring Blue/violet-ring White/violet-ring Red/pink-ring Yellow/pink-ring Blue/pink-ring White/pink-ring Pink/yellow-ring Black/yellow
PIM2_42 Connection Data

The PIM2_42 provides 42 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has two 100-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector serves the first 21 E1s (#1 to #21) receive and transmit signals, and the lower connector serves the second 21 E1s (#22 to #42) receive and transmit signals. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-7: PIM2_42 E1 connectors pin identification Table A-9: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines upper connector (1-21) pin assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CGND CGND RTIP1 RRING1 RTIP2 RRING2 RTIP3
Shield Shield Receive, tributary 1, wire A Receive, tributary 1, wire B Receive, tributary 2, wire A Receive, tributary 2, wire B Receive, tributary 3, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input
Brown/green-ring Light Gray/green-ring Brown Brown/gray-ring Red Red/gray-ring Orange
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-13
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Function Direction Wire color
Pin
Name
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
RRING3 RTIP4 RRING4 RTIP5 RRING5 RTIP6 RRING6 RTIP7 RRING7 RTIP8 RRING8 RTIP9 RRING9 RTIP10 CGND CGND CGND CGND TTIP1 TRING1 TTIP2 TRING2 TTIP3 TRING3 TTIP4 TRING4 TTIP5 TRING5 TTIP6 TRING6 TTIP7 TRING7 TTIP8 TRING8 TTIP9 TRING9 TTIP10
Receive, tributary 3, wire B Receive, tributary 4, wire A Receive, tributary 4, wire B Receive, tributary 5, wire A Receive, tributary 5, wire B Receive, tributary 6, wire A Receive, tributary 6, wire B Receive, tributary 7, wire A Receive, tributary 7, wire B Receive, tributary 8, wire A Receive, tributary 8, wire B Receive, tributary 9, wire A Receive, tributary 9, wire B Receive, tributary 10, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Transmit, tributary 10, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Orange/gray-ring Yellow Yellow/gray-ring Green Green/gray-ring Blue Blue/gray-ring Violet Violet/gray-ring White White/gray-ring Pink Pink/gray-ring Brown/white-ring Red/white-ring Violet/green-ring Blue/green-ring Pink/orange-ring Pink/blue-ring Brown/yellow-ring Red/yellow-ring Orange/yellow-ring Green/yellow-ring Blue/yellow-ring Violet/yellow-ring Light gray/yellow-ring White/yellow-ring Brown/blue-ring Red/blue-ring Orange/blue-ring Yellow/blue-ring Green/blue-ring Violet/blue-ring Light gray/blue-ring White/blue-ring Brown/orange-ring Red/orange-ring Yellow/orange-ring Green/orange-ring
RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B
TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B
A-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
TTIP11 CGND CGND CGND CGND RTIP11 RTIP12 RTIP13
Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Receive, tributary 11, wire A Receive, tributary 12, wire A Receive, tributary 13, wire A
Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output
Blue/orange-ring Violet/orange-ring Pink/white-ring White/brown-ring Yellow/green-ring Orange/green-ring Orange/white-ring Yellow/white-ring Green/white-ring Blue/white-ring Violet/white-ring Light gray/white-ring Red/brown-ring Yellow/brown-ring Orange/brown-ring Green/brown-ring Blue/brown-ring Violet/brown-ring Light gray/brown-ring Pink/brown-ring Brown/red-ring Light gray/red-ring Yellow/red-ring Green/red-ring Blue/red-ring Violet/red-ring White/red-ring Pink/red-ring Pink/green-ring White/green-ring Black Black/white-ring Light gray/orange-ring White/orange-ring Brown/violet-ring Red/violet-ring Orange/violet-ring Yellow/violet-ring
A-15
RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B
RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A
RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B RTIP16 RTIP17 RTIP18 RTIP19 RTIP20 RTIP21 CGND CGND CGND CGND TTIP12 TTIP13 TTIP14 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Receive, tributary 17, wire A Receive, tributary 18, wire A Receive, tributary 19, wire A Receive, tributary 20, wire A Receive, tributary 21, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Transmit, tributary 14, wire A RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B
TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Pin
Name
85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
TTIP15 TTIP16 TTIP17 TTIP18 TTIP19 TTIP20 TTIP21 CGND CGND
Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Shield Shield
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Green/violet-ring Blue/violet-ring Light gray/violet-ring White/violet-ring Brown/pink-ring Red/pink-ring Orange/pink-ring Yellow/pink-ring Green/pink-ring Blue/pink-ring Light gray/pink-ring White/pink-ring Pink/violet-ring Pink/yellow-ring Black/yellow-ring Black/pink-ring
TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B
Table A-10: PIM2_42 receive/transmit lines lower connector (22-42) pin assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CGND CGND RTIP22 RTIP23 RTIP24 RTIP25 RTIP26 RTIP27 RTIP28 RTIP29 RTIP30
Shield Shield Receive, tributary 22, wire A Receive, tributary 23, wire A Receive, tributary 24, wire A Receive, tributary 25, wire A Receive, tributary 26, wire A Receive, tributary 27, wire A Receive, tributary 28, wire A Receive, tributary 29, wire A Receive, tributary 30, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown/green-ring Light Gray/green-ring Brown Brown/gray-ring Red Red/gray-ring Orange Orange/gray-ring Yellow Yellow/gray-ring Green Green/gray-ring Blue Blue/gray-ring Violet Violet/gray-ring White White/gray-ring Pink Pink/gray-ring
RRING22 Receive, tributary 22, wire B RRING23 Receive, tributary 23, wire B RRING24 Receive, tributary 24, wire B RRING25 Receive, tributary 25, wire B RRING26 Receive, tributary 26, wire B RRING27 Receive, tributary 27, wire B RRING28 Receive, tributary 28, wire B RRING29 Receive, tributary 29, wire B RRING30 Receive, tributary 30, wire B
A-16
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
RTIP31 CGND CGND CGND CGND TTIP22 TTIP23 TTIP24 TTIP25 TTIP26 TTIP27 TTIP28 TTIP29 TTIP30 TTIP31 TTIP32 CGND CGND CGND CGND RTIP32 RTIP33 RTIP34
Receive, tributary 31, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Transmit, tributary 22, wire A Transmit, tributary 23, wire A Transmit, tributary 24, wire A Transmit, tributary 25, wire A Transmit, tributary 26, wire A Transmit, tributary 27, wire A Transmit, tributary 28, wire A Transmit, tributary 29, wire A Transmit, tributary 30, wire A Transmit, tributary 31, wire A Transmit, tributary 32, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Receive, tributary 32, wire A Receive, tributary 33, wire A Receive, tributary 34, wire A
Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown/white-ring Red/white-ring Violet/green-ring Blue/green-ring Pink/orange-ring Pink/blue-ring Brown/yellow-ring Red/yellow-ring Orange/yellow-ring Green/yellow-ring Blue/yellow-ring Violet/yellow-ring Light gray/yellow-ring White/yellow-ring Brown/blue-ring Red/blue-ring Orange/blue-ring Yellow/blue-ring Green/blue-ring Violet/blue-ring Light gray/blue-ring White/blue-ring Brown/orange-ring Red/orange-ring Yellow/orange-ring Green/orange-ring Blue/orange-ring Violet/orange-ring Pink/white-ring White/brown-ring Yellow/green-ring Orange/green-ring Orange/white-ring Yellow/white-ring Green/white-ring Blue/white-ring Violet/white-ring Light gray/white-ring
TRING22 Transmit, tributary 22, wire B TRING23 Transmit, tributary 23, wire B TRING24 Transmit, tributary 24, wire B TRING25 Transmit, tributary 25, wire B TRING26 Transmit, tributary 26, wire B TRING27 Transmit, tributary 27, wire B TRING28 Transmit, tributary 28, wire B TRING29 Transmit, tributary 29, wire B TRING30 Transmit, tributary 30, wire B TRING31 Transmit, tributary 31, wire B TRING32 Transmit, tributary 32, wire B
RRING32 Receive, tributary 32, wire B RRING33 Receive, tributary 33, wire B
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-17
Pin
Name
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
RTIP35
Receive, tributary 35, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Red/brown-ring Yellow/brown-ring Orange/brown-ring Green/brown-ring Blue/brown-ring Violet/brown-ring Light gray/brown-ring Pink/brown-ring Brown/red-ring Light gray/red-ring Yellow/red-ring Green/red-ring Blue/red-ring Violet/red-ring White/red-ring Pink/red-ring Pink/green-ring White/green-ring Black Black/white-ring Light gray/orange-ring White/orange-ring Brown/violet-ring Red/violet-ring Orange/violet-ring Yellow/violet-ring Green/violet-ring Blue/violet-ring Light gray/violet-ring White/violet-ring Brown/pink-ring Red/pink-ring Orange/pink-ring Yellow/pink-ring Green/pink-ring Blue/pink-ring Light gray/pink-ring White/pink-ring
RRING36 Receive, tributary 36, wire B RTIP37 RTIP38 RTIP39 RTIP40 RTIP41 RTIP42 CGND CGND CGND CGND TTIP33 TTIP34 TTIP35 TTIP36 TTIP37 TTIP38 TTIP39 TTIP40 TTIP41 Receive, tributary 37, wire A Receive, tributary 38, wire A Receive, tributary 39, wire A Receive, tributary 40, wire A Receive, tributary 41 wire A Receive, tributary 42, wire A Shield Shield Shield Shield Transmit, tributary 33, wire A Transmit, tributary 34, wire A Transmit, tributary 35, wire A Transmit, tributary 36, wire A Transmit, tributary 37, wire A Transmit, tributary 38, wire A Transmit, tributary 39, wire A Transmit, tributary 40, wire A Transmit, tributary 41, wire A RRING37 Receive, tributary 37, wire B RRING38 Receive, tributary 38, wire B RRING39 Receive, tributary 39, wire B RRING40 Receive, tributary 40, wire B RRING41 Receive, tributary 41, wire B RRING42 Receive, tributary 42, wire B
TRING33 Transmit, tributary 33, wire B TRING34 Transmit, tributary 34, wire B TRING35 Transmit, tributary 35, wire B TRING36 Transmit, tributary 36, wire B TRING37 Transmit, tributary 37, wire B TRING38 Transmit, tributary 38, wire B TRING39 Transmit, tributary 39, wire B TRING40 Transmit, tributary 40, wire B TRING41 Transmit, tributary 41, wire B
A-18
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
97 98 99 100
TTIP42 CGND CGND
Transmit, tributary 42, wire A Shield Shield
Output Output
Pink/violet-ring Pink/yellow-ring Black/yellow-ring Black/pink-ring
PIM2_63/B Connection Data

The PIM2_63/B provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has three pairs of 50-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector pair supports 21 E1 interfaces. The upper connector in each pair serves the E1 receive signals and the lower, the E1 transmit signals. The tributaries and type of signal (IN for receive, OUT for transmit) supported by each connector are marked near the connector: IN 1-21, OUT 1-21, IN 22-42, OUT 22-42, IN 43-63, and OUT 43-63. The following figure identifies the connector pins in each pair as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector pair (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The tributary numbers appearing in these tables are given for the IN 1-21 and OUT 1-21 connectors. To obtain the correct tributary numbers for the other connectors, interpret the numbers as representing the number of the tributary in its group (for example, in connectors IN 22-42 and OUT 22-42, 7 represents E1 tributary 28; in connectors IN 43-63 and OUT 43-63, 12 represents E1 tributary 57).
Figure A-8: PIM2_63/B typical pair connectors pin identification
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-19
Table A-11: PIM2_63/B typical receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
RTIP1 RTIP2 RTIP3 RTIP4 RTIP5 RTIP6 RTIP7 GND RTIP8 RTIP9 RTIP10 RTIP11 RTIP12 RTIP13 RTIP14 GND RTIP15 RTIP16 RTIP17 RTIP18 RTIP19 RTIP20 RTIP21 GND GND RRING1 RRING2 RRING3 RRING4 RRING5 RRING6 RRING7 GND RRING8 RRING9 RRING10 RRING11
Receive, tributary 1, wire A Receive, tributary 2, wire A Receive, tributary 3, wire A Receive, tributary 4, wire A Receive, tributary 5, wire A Receive, tributary 6, wire A Receive, tributary 7, wire A Shield Receive, tributary 8, wire A Receive, tributary 9, wire A Receive, tributary 10, wire A Receive, tributary 11, wire A Receive, tributary 12, wire A Receive, tributary 13, wire A Receive, tributary 14, wire A Shield Receive, tributary 15, wire A Receive, tributary 16, wire A Receive, tributary 17, wire A Receive, tributary 18, wire A Receive, tributary 19, wire A Receive, tributary 20, wire A Receive, tributary 21, wire A Shield Not connected Shield Receive, tributary 1, wire B Receive, tributary 2, wire B Receive, tributary 3, wire B Receive, tributary 4, wire B Receive, tributary 5, wire B Receive, tributary 6, wire B Receive, tributary 7, wire B Shield Receive, tributary 8, wire B Receive, tributary 9, wire B Receive, tributary 10, wire B Receive, tributary 11, wire B
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Violet Brown/green-ring White Pink Brown/white-ring Orange/white-ring Green/white-ring Violet/white-ring Red/brown-ring Light-gray/green-ring Orange/brown-ring Blue/brown-ring Light-gray/brown-ring Brown/red-ring Yellow/red-ring Blue/red-ring White/red-ring Yellow/green-ring Orange/green-ring Brown/gray-ring Red/gray-ring Orange/gray-ring Yellow/gray-ring Green/gray-ring Blue/gray-ring Violet/gray-ring Violet/green-ring White/gray-ring Pink/gray-ring Red/white-ring Yellow/white-ring
A-20
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Direction
Wire color
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
RRING12 RRING13 RRING14 GND RRING15 RRING16 RRING17 RRING18 RRING19 RRING20 RRING21 GND
Receive, tributary 12, wire B Receive, tributary 13, wire B Receive, tributary 14, wire B Shield Receive, tributary 15, wire B Receive, tributary 16, wire B Receive, tributary 17, wire B Receive, tributary 18, wire B Receive, tributary 19, wire B Receive, tributary 20, wire B Receive, tributary 21, wire B Shield
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Blue/white-ring Light-gray/white-ring Yellow/brown-ring Blue/green-ring Green/brown-ring Violet/brown-ring Pink/brown-ring Light-gray/red-ring Green/red-ring Violet/red-ring Pink/red-ring Pink/green-ring
Table A-12: PIM2_63 typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TTIP1 TTIP2 TTIP3 TTIP4 TTIP5 TTIP6 TTIP7 GND TTIP8 TTIP9 TTIP10 TTIP11 TTIP12 TTIP13 TTIP14 GND TTIP15 TTIP16 TTIP17 TTIP18 TTIP19 TTIP20 TTIP21 GND
Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Shield Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Shield Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Shield
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Brown/yellow-ring Orange/yellow-ring Blue/yellow-ring Light-gray/yellow-ring Brown/blue-ring Orange/blue-ring Green/blue-ring Pink/orange-ring Light-gray/blue-ring Brown/orange-ring Yellow/orange-ring Blue/orange-ring Light-gray/orange-ring Brown/violet-ring Orange/violet-ring Pink/blue-ring Green/violet-ring Light-gray/violet-ring Brown/pink-ring Orange/pink-ring Green/pink-ring Light-gray/pink-ring Pink/violet-ring Pink/white-ring
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-21
Pin
Name
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
GND TRING1 TRING2 TRING3 TRING4 TRING5 TRING6 TRING7 GND TRING8 TRING9 TRING10 TRING11 TRING12 TRING13 TRING14 GND TRING15 TRING16 TRING17 TRING18 TRING19 TRING20 TRING21 GND
Not connected Shield Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Shield Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Shield Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Shield
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
White/brown-ring Red/yellow-ring Green/yellow-ring Violet/yellow-ring White/yellow-ring Red/blue-ring Yellow/blue-ring Violet/blue-ring Black White/blue-ring Red/orange-ring Green/orange-ring Violet/orange-ring White/orange-ring Red/violet-ring Yellow/violet-ring Black/white-ring Blue/violet-ring White/violet-ring Red/pink-ring Yellow/pink-ring Blue/pink-ring White/pink-ring Pink/yellow-ring Black/yellow
A-22
417006-2311-0H3-B00
PIM2_63S Connection Data

The PIM2_63S provides 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary interfaces and has a 272-pin VHDCI female connector. The connector has two parts, each with 136 pins; the upper part serves the 63 E1 transmit signals and the lower part, the 63 E1 receive signals. ECI Telecom offers a special cable for connecting to the PIM2_63S. For a description of the cable refer to Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S (on page 6-8). The cable end, connecting to the PIM2_63S terminates with a double 136-pin VHDCI male connector. The connector parts are designated as P1 for the transmit lines and P3 for the receive lines. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The tables list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cable offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division for connecting the tributary connector and a distribution frame. The cable marking in the heading of each table refers to the 26AWG cable connected to the connectors as designated in the cable description.
Figure A-9: PIM2_63S connector pin identification Table A-13: Connector P1 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Tx lines
Pin Name Function Cable a (Red dots on jacket) Direction Wire color
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
CGND CGND TXD_P1 TXD_N1 TXD_P2 TXD_N2 TXD_P3 TXD_N3 TXD_P4 TXD_N4 TXD_P5 TXD_N5 TXD_P6 TXD_N6
Shield Shield Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Transmit, tributary 6, wire B
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Brown Brown/Gray Red Red/Gray Orange Orange/Gray Yellow Yellow/Gray Green Green/Gray Blue Blue/Gray
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-23

Function Direction Wire color
Pin
Name
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
TXD_P7 TXD_N7 TXD_P8 TXD_N8 TXD_P9 TXD_N9 TXD_P10 TXD_N10 TXD_P11 TXD_N11 TXD_P12 TXD_N12 TXD_P13 TXD_N13 TXD_P14 TXD_N14 TXD_P15 TXD_N15 TXD_P16 TXD_N16 --TXD_P17 TXD_N17 TXD_P18 TXD_N18 TXD_P19 TXD_N19 TXD_P20 TXD_N20 TXD_P21 TXD_N21
Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Transmit, tributary 16, wire B N/C N/C Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Transmit, tributary 21, wire B
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output --Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Purple Purple/Gray White White/Gray Pink Pink/Gray Brown/White Red/White Orange/White Yellow/White Green/White Blue/White Purple/White Light-Gray/White Red/Brown Yellow/Brown Orange/Brown Green/Brown Blue/Brown Purple/Brown --Light-Gray/Brown Pink/Brown Brown/Red Light-Gray/Red Yellow/Red Green/Red Blue/Red Purple/Red White/Red Pink/Red
Table A-14: Connector P3 E1 #1 to E1 #21 Rx lines

Pin Name Function Cable b (Red dots on jacket) Direction Wire color
91 92 93 94 95 96 97 A-24
RXD_N21 RXD_P21 RXD_N20 RXD_P20 RXD_N19 RXD_P19 RXD_N18
Receive, tributary 21, wire A Receive, tributary 21, wire B Receive, tributary 20, wire A Receive, tributary 20, wire B Receive, tributary 19, wire A Receive, tributary 19, wire B Receive, tributary 18, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown/Yellow Red/Yellow Orange/Yellow Green/Yellow Blue/Yellow Purple/Yellow Light-Gray/Yellow 417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 RXD_P18 RXD_N17 RXD_P17 --RXD_N16 RXD_P16 RXD_N15 RXD_P15 RXD_N14 RXD_P14 RXD_N13 RXD_P13 RXD_N12 RXD_P12 RXD_N11 RXD_P11 RXD_N10 RXD_P10 RXD_N9 RXD_P9 RXD_N8 RXD_P8 RXD_N7 RXD_P7 RXD_N6 RXD_P6 RXD_N5 RXD_P5 RXD_N4 RXD_P4 RXD_N3 RXD_P3 RXD_N2 RXD_P2 RXD_N1 RXD_P1 --Receive, tributary 18, wire B Receive, tributary 17, wire A Receive, tributary 17, wire B N/C N/C Receive, tributary 16, wire A Receive, tributary 16, wire B Receive, tributary 15, wire A Receive, tributary 15, wire B Receive, tributary 14, wire A Receive, tributary 14, wire B Receive, tributary 13, wire A Receive, tributary 13, wire B Receive, tributary 12, wire A Receive, tributary 12, wire B Receive, tributary 11, wire A Receive, tributary 11, wire B Receive, tributary 10, wire A Receive, tributary 10, wire B Receive, tributary 9, wire A Receive, tributary 9, wire B Receive, tributary 8, wire A Receive, tributary 8, wire B Receive, tributary 7, wire A Receive, tributary 7, wire B Receive, tributary 6, wire A Receive, tributary 6, wire B Receive, tributary 5, wire A Receive, tributary 5, wire B Receive, tributary 4, wire A Receive, tributary 4, wire B Receive, tributary 3, wire A Receive, tributary 3, wire B Receive, tributary 2, wire A Receive, tributary 2, wire B Receive, tributary 1, wire A Receive, tributary 1, wire B N/C N/C Input Input Input --Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input ---
White/Yellow Brown/Blue Red/Blue --Orange/Blue Yellow/Blue Green/Blue Purple/Blue Light-Gray/Blue White/Blue Brown/Orange Red/Orange Yellow/Orange Green/Orange Blue/Orange Purple/Orange Light-Gray/Orange White/Orange Brown/Purple Red/Purple Orange/Purple Yellow/Purple Green/Purple Blue/Purple Light-Gray/Purple White/Purple Brown/Pink Red/Pink Orange/Pink Yellow/Pink Green/Pink Blue/Pink Light-Gray/Pink White/Pink Pink/Purple Pink/Yellow ---
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-25
Table A-15: Connector P1 E1 #22 to E1 #42 Tx lines

Pin Name Function Cable c (Blue dots on jacket) Direction Wire color
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
TXD_P22 TXD_N22 TXD_P23 TXD_N23 TXD_P24 TXD_N24 TXD_P25 TXD_N25 TXD_P26 TXD_N26 TXD_P27 TXD_N27 TXD_P28 TXD_N28 TXD_P29 TXD_N29 TXD_P30 TXD_N30 TXD_P31 TXD_N31 ----TXD_P32 TXD_N32 TXD_P33 TXD_N33 TXD_P34 TXD_N34 TXD_P35 TXD_N35 TXD_P36 TXD_N36 TXD_P37 TXD_N37 TXD_P38 TXD_N38 TXD_P39 TXD_N39
Transmit, tributary 22, wire A Transmit, tributary22, wire B Transmit, tributary 23, wire A Transmit, tributary 23, wire B Transmit, tributary 24, wire A Transmit, tributary 24, wire B Transmit, tributary 25, wire A Transmit, tributary 25, wire B Transmit, tributary 26, wire A Transmit, tributary 26, wire B Transmit, tributary 27, wire A Transmit, tributary 27, wire B Transmit, tributary 28, wire A Transmit, tributary 28, wire B Transmit, tributary 29, wire A Transmit, tributary 29, wire B Transmit, tributary 30, wire A Transmit, tributary 30, wire B Transmit, tributary 31, wire A Transmit, tributary 31, wire B N/C N/C N/C N/C Transmit, tributary 32, wire A Transmit, tributary 32, wire B Transmit, tributary 33, wire A Transmit, tributary 33, wire B Transmit, tributary 34, wire A Transmit, tributary 34, wire B Transmit, tributary 35, wire A Transmit, tributary 35, wire B Transmit, tributary 36, wire A Transmit, tributary 36, wire B Transmit, tributary 37, wire A Transmit, tributary 37, wire B Transmit, tributary 38, wire A Transmit, tributary 38, wire B Transmit, tributary 39, wire A Transmit, tributary 39, wire B
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output ----Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Brown Brown/Gray Red Red/Gray Orange Orange/Gray Yellow Yellow/Gray Green Green/Gray Blue Blue/Gray Purple Purple/Gray White White/Gray Pink Pink/Gray Brown/White Red/White ----Orange/White Yellow/White Green/White Blue/White Purple/White Light-Gray/White Red/Brown Yellow/Brown Orange/Brown Green/Brown Blue/Brown Purple/Brown Light-Gray/Brown Pink/Brown Brown/Red Light-Gray/Red
A-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00

Pin Name Function
Direction
Wire color
87 88 89 90 91 92
TXD_P40 TXD_N40 TXD_P41 TXD_N41 TXD_P42 TXD_N42
Transmit, tributary 40, wire A Transmit, tributary 40, wire B Transmit, tributary 41, wire A Transmit, tributary 41, wire B Transmit, tributary 42, wire A Transmit, tributary 42, wire B
Output Output Output Output Output Output
Yellow/Red Green/Red Blue/Red Purple/Red White/Red Pink/Red

Pin Name Function Cable d (Blue dots on jacket) Direction Wire color
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
RXD_N42 RXD_P42 RXD_N41 RXD_P41 RXD_N40 RXD_P40 RXD_N39 RXD_P39 RXD_N38 RXD_P38 RXD_N37 RXD_P37 RXD_N36 RXD_P36 RXD_N35 RXD_P35 RXD_N34 RXD_P34 RXD_N33 RXD_P33 RXD_N32 RXD_P32 ----RXD_N31 RXD_P31 RXD_N30 RXD_P30 RXD_N29 RXD_P29 RXD_N28
Receive, tributary 42, wire A Receive, tributary 42, wire B Receive, tributary 41, wire A Receive, tributary 41, wire B Receive, tributary 40, wire A Receive, tributary 40, wire B Receive, tributary 39, wire A Receive, tributary 39, wire B Receive, tributary 38, wire A Receive, tributary 38, wire B Receive, tributary 37, wire A Receive, tributary 37, wire B Receive, tributary 36, wire A Receive, tributary 36, wire B Receive, tributary 35, wire A Receive, tributary 35, wire B Receive, tributary 34, wire A Receive, tributary 34, wire B Receive, tributary 33, wire A Receive, tributary 33, wire B Receive, tributary 32, wire A Receive, tributary 32, wire B N/C N/C N/C N/C Receive, tributary 31, wire A Receive, tributary 31, wire B Receive, tributary 30, wire A Receive, tributary 30, wire B Receive, tributary 29, wire A Receive, tributary 29, wire B Receive, tributary 28, wire A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input ----Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Brown/Yellow Red/Yellow Orange/Yellow Green/Yellow Blue/Yellow Purple/Yellow Light-Gray/Yellow White/Yellow Brown/Blue Red/Blue Orange/Blue Yellow/Blue Green/Blue Purple/Blue Light-Gray/Blue White/Blue Brown/Orange Red/Orange Yellow/Orange Green/Orange Blue/Orange Purple/Orange ----Light-Gray/Orange White/Orange Brown/Purple Red/Purple Orange/Purple Yellow/Purple Green/Purple
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-27
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Receive, tributary 28, wire B Receive, tributary 27, wire A Receive, tributary 27, wire B Receive, tributary 26, wire A Receive, tributary 26, wire B Receive, tributary 25, wire A Receive, tributary 25, wire B Receive, tributary 24, wire A Receive, tributary 24, wire B Receive, tributary 23, wire A Receive, tributary 23, wire B Receive, tributary 22, wire A Receive, tributary 22, wire B Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Blue/Purple Light-Gray/Purple White/Purple Brown/Pink Red/Pink Orange/Pink Yellow/Pink Green/Pink Blue/Pink Light-Gray/Pink White/Pink Pink/Purple Pink/Yellow
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
RXD_P28 RXD_N27 RXD_P27 RXD_N26 RXD_P26 RXD_N25 RXD_P25 RXD_N24 RXD_P24 RXD_N23 RXD_P23 RXD_N22 RXD_P22
Table A-17: Connector P1 E1 #43 to E1 #63 Tx lines

Pin Name Function Cable e (Yellow dots on jacket) Direction Wire color
93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 A-28
TXD_P43 TXD_N43 TXD_P44 TXD_N44 TXD_P45 TXD_N45 TXD_P46 TXD_N46 TXD_P47 TXD_N47 TXD_P48 TXD_N48 TXD_P49 TXD_N49 TXD_P50 TXD_N50 TXD_P51 TXD_N51 TXD_P52 TXD_N52 TXD_P53 TXD_N53 TXD_P54 TXD_N54 TXD_P55 TXD_N55 TXD_P56
Transmit, tributary 43, wire A Transmit, tributary 43, wire B Transmit, tributary 44, wire A Transmit, tributary 44, wire B Transmit, tributary 45, wire A Transmit, tributary 45, wire B Transmit, tributary 46, wire A Transmit, tributary 46, wire B Transmit, tributary 47, wire A Transmit, tributary 47, wire B Transmit, tributary 48, wire A Transmit, tributary 48, wire B Transmit, tributary 49, wire A Transmit, tributary 49, wire B Transmit, tributary 50, wire A Transmit, tributary 50, wire B Transmit, tributary 51, wire A Transmit, tributary 51, wire B Transmit, tributary 52, wire A Transmit, tributary 52, wire B Transmit, tributary 53, wire A Transmit, tributary 53, wire B Transmit, tributary 54, wire A Transmit, tributary 54, wire B Transmit, tributary 55, wire A Transmit, tributary 55, wire B Transmit, tributary 56, wire A
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Brown Brown/Gray Red Red/Gray Orange Orange/Gray Yellow Yellow/Gray Green Green/Gray Blue Blue/Gray Purple Purple/Gray White White/Gray Pink Pink/Gray Brown/White Red/White Orange/White Yellow/White Green/White Blue/White Purple/White Light-Gray/White Red/Brown 417006-2311-0H3-B00

Pin Name Function
Direction
Wire color
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136
TXD_N56 TXD_P57 TXD_N57 TXD_P58 TXD_N58 TXD_P59 TXD_N59 TXD_P60 TXD_N60 TXD_P61 TXD_N61 TXD_P62 TXD_N62 TXD_P63 TXD_N63 ---
Transmit, tributary 56, wire B Transmit, tributary 57, wire A Transmit, tributary 57, wire B Transmit, tributary 58, wire A Transmit, tributary 58, wire B Transmit, tributary 59, wire A Transmit, tributary 59, wire B Transmit, tributary 60, wire A Transmit, tributary 60, wire B Transmit, tributary 61, wire A Transmit, tributary 61, wire B Transmit, tributary 62, wire A Transmit, tributary 62, wire B Transmit, tributary 63, wire A Transmit, tributary 63, wire B N/C N/C
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output ---
Yellow/Brown Orange/Brown Green/Brown Blue/Brown Purple/Brown Light-Gray/Brown Pink/Brown Brown/Red Light-Gray/Red Yellow/Red Green/Red Blue/Red Purple/Red White/Red Pink/Red ---

Cable f (Yellow dots on jacket) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 --RXD_N63 RXD_P63 RXD_N62 RXD_P62 RXD_N61 RXD_P61 RXD_N60 RXD_P60 RXD_N59 RXD_P59 RXD_N58 RXD_P58 RXD_N57 RXD_P57 RXD_N56 RXD_P56 RXD_N55 RXD_P55 RXD_N54 N/C N/C Receive, tributary 63, wire A Receive, tributary 63, wire B Receive, tributary 62, wire A Receive, tributary 62, wire B Receive, tributary 61, wire A Receive, tributary 61, wire B Receive, tributary 60, wire A Receive, tributary 60, wire B Receive, tributary 59, wire A Receive, tributary 59, wire B Receive, tributary 58, wire A Receive, tributary 58, wire B Receive, tributary 57, wire A Receive, tributary 57, wire B Receive, tributary 56, wire A Receive, tributary 56, wire B Receive, tributary 55, wire A Receive, tributary 55, wire B Receive, tributary 54, wire A --Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input --Brown/Yellow Red/Yellow Orange/Yellow Green/Yellow Blue/Yellow Purple/Yellow Light-Gray/Yellow White/Yellow Brown/Blue Red/Blue Orange/Blue Yellow/Blue Green/Blue Purple/Blue Light-Gray/Blue White/Blue Brown/Orange Red/Orange Yellow/Orange
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-29

Function Direction Wire color
Pin
Name
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 135 136
RXD_P54 RXD_N53 RXD_P53 RXD_N52 RXD_P52 RXD_N51 RXD_P51 RXD_N50 RXD_P50 RXD_N49 RXD_P49 RXD_N48 RXD_P48 RXD_N47 RXD_P47 RXD_N46 RXD_P46 RXD_N45 RXD_P45 RXD_N44 RXD_P44 RXD_N43 RXD_P43 ---
Receive, tributary 54, wire B Receive, tributary 53, wire A Receive, tributary 53, wire B Receive, tributary 52, wire A Receive, tributary 52, wire B Receive, tributary 51, wire A Receive, tributary 51, wire B Receive, tributary 50, wire A Receive, tributary 50, wire B Receive, tributary 49, wire A Receive, tributary 49 wire B Receive, tributary 48, wire A Receive, tributary 48, wire B Receive, tributary 47, wire A Receive, tributary 47, wire B Receive, tributary 46, wire A Receive, tributary 46, wire B Receive, tributary 45, wire A Receive, tributary 45, wire B Receive, tributary 44, wire A Receive, tributary 44, wire B Receive, tributary 43, wire A Receive, tributary 43, wire B N/C N/C
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input ---
Green/Orange Blue/Orange Purple/Orange Light-Gray/Orange White/Orange Brown/Purple Red/Purple Orange/Purple Yellow/Purple Green/Purple Blue/Purple Light-Gray/Purple White/Purple Brown/Pink Red/Pink Orange/Pink Yellow/Pink Green/Pink Blue/Pink Light-Gray/Pink White/Pink Pink/Purple Pink/Yellow ---
A-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors
EISMB_804 and DIOM_04 are GbE/Fast Ethernet modules that provide electrical 10/100/1000BaseT ports. DIOM_08 is a Fast Ethernet module that provides 10/100BaseT ports. MCSM in an MPLS Core Switch module that provides 10/100BaseT ports. All these modules use 8-pin RJ-45 connectors for the electrical ports. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The first table lists the pin out for a 10/100BaseT interface and the second for a 1000BaseT interface.
Figure A-10: 10/100BaseT connectors pin identification Table A-19: 10/100BaseT connectors pin assignment Pin Designation Function Direction
1 2 3 6
TD+ TD RD+ RD
Transmit, + wire Output Transmit, wire Output Receive, + wire Receive, wire Input Input
Table A-20: 1000BaseT connector pin assignment Pin Designation Function Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TR1P TR1N TR2P TR2N TR3P TR3N TR4P TR4N
Transmit/Receive, pair 1, + wire Transmit/Receive, pair 1, wire Transmit/Receive, pair 2, + wire Transmit/Receive, pair 2 wire Transmit/Receive, pair 3 + wire Transmit/Receive, pair 3 wire Transmit/Receive, pair 4 + wire Transmit/Receive, pair 4 wire
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-31
ACP100 Connectors
ACP100 is the control plane for ASON based networks working with XDM small shelves. The ACP100 has four Ethernet ports used to connect the module to the system management and protection option. All ports use 10-pin RJ-45 connectors and operate at 10/100BaseT. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure A-11: ACP100 connector pin identification Table A-21: ACP100 Ethernet connector pin assignments Pin Designation Function Direction
1 2 3, 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RX+ RXVCC TX+ TXLED_RA LED_RC LED_LA LED_LC
Receive + wire Receive - wire Power 3.3 V Transmit + wire Transmit - wire Indicator light Indicator light Indicator light Indicator light
Input Input Output Output
A-32
417006-2311-0H3-B00
xRAP-100 Connectors
Shelf DC Input Power Connectors
The shelf DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and Shelf 3 are 3-pin D-type male connectors. The Shelf 4 connector is a 5-pin D-type male connector that can be connected to regular or high-power XDM shelves or to BG shelves. The following figure identifies the functions of the shelf DC input connectors pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-12: DC input power connectors pin functions
SHELF ALARM Connectors

The four ALARMS connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM platform or to a BG platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the connector).
Figure A-13: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Table A-22: xRAP-100 SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment Pin Name Function Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6
N/C ALM_IP1 ALM_IN1 ALM_IP2 ALM_IN2 ALM_IP3
-Alarm input 1, + wire Alarm input 1, - wire Alarm input 2, + wire Alarm input 2, - wire Alarm input 3, + wire
-Input Input Input Input Input

A-33
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
ALM_IN3 ALM_IP4 ALM_IN4 N/C N/C GND ALM_O1 N/C GND ALM_O2 N/C BUZ_COM N/C GND CRIT_COM N/C MAJ_COM GND N/C GND MIN_COM N/C WARN_COM GND N/C N/C N/C N/C GND N/C
Alarm input 3, - wire Alarm input 4, + wire Alarm input 4, - wire --Ground Alarm output 1 common -Ground Alarm output 2 common -Buzzer common -Ground Critical alarm common -Major alarm common Ground -Ground Minor alarm common -Warning alarm common Ground ----Ground --
Input Input Input ---Output --Output -Input ----Input ---Input ----------
A-34
417006-2311-0H3-B00
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the XDM shelves. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM platform. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility. Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each XDM platform connected to the xRAP-100. Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of XDM shelves.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state, and 1A in closed state. The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-14: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT connector.
Table A-23: xRAP-100 ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment
Assignment Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Shelf 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ALM_01NO ALM_01COM ALM_01NC ALM_02NO ALM_02COM ALM_02NC ALM_03NO ALM_03COM ALM_03NC
Output relay 1, normally open Output contact Output relay 1, common contact Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output Output
Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Violet Gray
Shelf 2
7 8 9
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-35

Designation Function Direction Wire color
Assignment
Pin
10 11 12 Shelf 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 Shelf 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 All shelves 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
ALM_04NO ALM_04COM ALM_04NC ALM_05NO ALM_05COM ALM_05NC ALM_06NO ALM_06COM ALM_06NC ALM_07NO ALM_07COM ALM_07NC ALM_08NO ALM_08COM ALM_08NC CRIT_NC CRIT_NO CRIT_COM MAJ_NC MAJ_NO MAJ_COM MIN_NC MIN_NO MIN_COM WARN_COM
White Pink Light Green Black/White Brown/White Red/White Orange/White Green/White Blue/White Violet/White Red/Black Orange/Black Yellow/Black Green/Black Gray/Black Pink/Black Pink/Green Pink/Red Pink/Violet Light Blue Light Blue/Brown Light Blue/Red Light Blue/Violet Light Blue/Black Gray/Green
Output relay 8, normally open Output contact Output relay 8, common contact Output relay 8, normally closed contact Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact Critical alarm relay, normally open contact Critical alarm relay, common contact Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Major alarm relay, normally open contact Major alarm relay, common contact Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Minor alarm relay, common contact Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Warning alarm relay, common Output contact
A-36
417006-2311-0H3-B00

Assignment Pin Designation Function
Direction
Wire color
Shelf 1
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
ALMIN1 ALM_IN1 ALMIN2 ALM_IN2 ALMIN3 ALM_IN3 ALMIN4 ALM_IN4 ALMIN5 ALM_IN5 ALMIN6 ALM_IN6 ALMIN7 ALM_IN7 ALMIN8 ALM_IN8 ALMIN9 ALM_IN9 ALMIN10 ALM_IN10 ALMIN11 ALM_IN11 ALMIN12 ALM_IN12 ALMIN13 ALM_IN13 ALMIN14 ALM_IN14 ALMIN15 ALM_IN15 ALMIN16 ALM_IN16 WARN_NC WARN_NO
External alarm input 1 External alarm input 1 External alarm input 2 External alarm input 2 External alarm input 3 External alarm input 3 External alarm input 4 External alarm input 4 External alarm input 5 External alarm input 5 External alarm input 6 External alarm input 6 External alarm input 7 External alarm input 7 External alarm input 8 External alarm input 8 External alarm input 9 External alarm input 9 External alarm input 10 External alarm input 10 External alarm input 11 External alarm input 11 External alarm input 12 External alarm input 12 External alarm input 13 External alarm input 13 External alarm input 14 External alarm input 14 External alarm input 15 External alarm input 15 External alarm input 16 External alarm input 16 Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Warning alarm relay, normally open contact
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output
Gray/Red Gray/Violet Light Green/Black Violet/Black Black/White dots Brown/White dots Red/White dots Orange/White dots Green/White dots Blue/White dots Violet/White dots White/Black dots Yellow/Black dots Green/Black dots Light Blue/Black dots Pink/Black dots Red/Black dots Orange/Black dots Violet/Black dots Gray/Black dots
Shelf 2
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Shelf 3
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Orange/Red dots Yellow/Red dots Green/Red dots Violet/Red dots Gray/Red dots White/Red dots Pink/Red dots Yellow/White Gray/White Pink/White Brown/Black Blue/Black Gray/White dots
Shelf 4
59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
All shelves
67 68
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-37
RAP-4B Connectors
SHELF ALARM Connectors
The four ALARMS connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector can be connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM platform or to a BG platform. The following figure identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the connector).
Figure A-15: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin identification
The following table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Table A-24: RAP-4B SHELF ALARM connector pin assignment Pin Name Function Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A-38
N/C ALM_IP1 ALM_IN1 ALM_IP2 ALM_IN2 ALM_IP3 ALM_IN3 ALM_IP4 ALM_IN4 N/C N/C GND ALM_O1 N/C GND ALM_O2 N/C BUZ_COM N/C GND CRIT_COM
-Alarm input 1, + wire Alarm input 1, - wire Alarm input 2, + wire Alarm input 2, - wire Alarm input 3, + wire Alarm input 3, - wire Alarm input 4, + wire Alarm input 4, - wire --Ground Alarm output 1 common -Ground Alarm output 2 common -Buzzer common -Ground Critical alarm common
-Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input ---Output --Output -Input ---417006-2311-0H3-B00
Pin
Name
Function
Direction
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
N/C MAJ_COM GND N/C GND MIN_COM N/C WARN_COM GND N/C N/C N/C N/C GND N/C
-Major alarm common Ground -Ground Minor alarm common -Warning alarm common Ground ----Ground --
-Input ---Input ----------
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a 68-pin SCSI female connector that carries three groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the XDM shelves. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM platform. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customer's facility. Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the eight relays is assigned to the two output alarm lines of each XDM platform connected to the RAP-4B. Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of XDM shelves.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state, and 1A in closed state. The following figure identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-16: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin identification
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-39
The following table lists the pin assignment for the ALARM IN/OUT connector.
Table A-25: RAP-4B ALARM IN/OUT connector pin assignment
Shelf 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
ALM_01NO ALM_01COM ALM_01NC ALM_02NO ALM_02COM ALM_02NC ALM_03NO ALM_03COM ALM_03NC ALM_04NO ALM_04COM ALM_04NC ALM_05NO ALM_05COM ALM_05NC ALM_06NO ALM_06COM ALM_06NC ALM_07NO ALM_07COM ALM_07NC ALM_08NO ALM_08COM ALM_08NC
Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Violet Gray White Pink Light Green Black/White Brown/White Red/White Orange/White Green/White Blue/White Violet/White Red/Black Orange/Black Yellow/Black Green/Black Gray/Black
Shelf 2
7 8 9 10 11 12
Shelf 3
13 14 15 16 17 18
Shelf 4
19 20 21 22 23 24
A-40
417006-2311-0H3-B00

Assignment Pin Designation Function
Direction
Wire color
All shelves
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
CRIT_NC CRIT_NO CRIT_COM MAJ_NC MAJ_NO MAJ_COM MIN_NC MIN_NO MIN_COM WARN_COM ALMIN1 ALM_IN1 ALMIN2 ALM_IN2 ALMIN3 ALM_IN3 ALMIN4 ALM_IN4 ALMIN5 ALM_IN5 ALMIN6 ALM_IN6 ALMIN7 ALM_IN7 ALMIN8 ALM_IN8 ALMIN9 ALM_IN9 ALMIN10 ALM_IN10 ALMIN11 ALM_IN11
Critical alarm relay, normally closed contact Critical alarm relay, normally open contact Critical alarm relay, common contact Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Major alarm relay, normally open contact Major alarm relay, common contact Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Minor alarm relay, common contact
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Pink/Black Pink/Green Pink/Red Pink/Violet Light Blue Light Blue/Brown Light Blue/Red Light Blue/Violet Light Blue/Black Gray/Green Gray/Red Gray/Violet Light Green/Black Violet/Black Black/White dots Brown/White dots Red/White dots Orange/White dots Green/White dots Blue/White dots Violet/White dots White/Black dots Yellow/Black dots Green/Black dots Light Blue/Black dots Pink/Black dots Red/Black dots Orange/Black dots Violet/Black dots Gray/Black dots
Warning alarm relay, common Output contact External alarm input 1 External alarm input 1 External alarm input 2 External alarm input 2 External alarm input 3 External alarm input 3 External alarm input 4 External alarm input 4 External alarm input 5 External alarm input 5 External alarm input 6 External alarm input 6 External alarm input 7 External alarm input 7 External alarm input 8 External alarm input 8 External alarm input 9 External alarm input 9 External alarm input 10 External alarm input 10 External alarm input 11 External alarm input 11 Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Shelf 1
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Shelf 2
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Shelf 3
51 52 53 54 55 56
Orange/Red dots
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-41

Designation Function Direction Wire color
Assignment
Pin
57 58 Shelf 4 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 All shelves 67 68
ALMIN12 ALM_IN12 ALMIN13 ALM_IN13 ALMIN14 ALM_IN14 ALMIN15 ALM_IN15 ALMIN16 ALM_IN16 WARN_NC WARN_NO
External alarm input 12 External alarm input 12 External alarm input 13 External alarm input 13 External alarm input 14 External alarm input 14 External alarm input 15 External alarm input 15 External alarm input 16 External alarm input 16 Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Warning alarm relay, normally open contact
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output
Yellow/Red dots Green/Red dots Violet/Red dots Gray/Red dots White/Red dots Pink/Red dots Yellow/White Gray/White Pink/White Brown/Black Blue/Black Gray/White dots
xRAP-D Connectors
This section provides information on the connectors located on the xRAP-D unit.
Platform DC Input Power Connectors

The SHELF DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1 and Shelf 2, are 5-pin D-type male connectors. The following figure identifies the functions of the platform DC input connector pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure A-17: xRAP-D and xRAP-B shelf DC input power connector pin functions
A-42
417006-2311-0H3-B00
SHELF Alarm Connectors

The SHELF alarm connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each connector is connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM-300 platform. Refer to ALARMS Connector (on page A-2) for description. The following figure identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the connector, and the table lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Figure A-18: SHELF alarm connector pin identification Table A-26: SHELF alarm connector pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
N/C ALM_IP1 ALM_IN1 ALM_IP2 ALM_IN2 ALM_IP3 ALM_IN3 ALM_IP4 ALM_IN4 ALM_O4 N/C GND ALM_O1 N/C GND ALM_O2 N/C BUZZ N/C GND CRIT_COM N/C MAJ_COM GND N/C GND
Not connected Alarm input 1, + wire Alarm input 1, wire Alarm input 2, + wire Alarm input 2, wire Alarm input 3, + wire Alarm input 3, wire Alarm input 4, + wire Alarm input 4, wire Alarm output 4 Not connected Ground Alarm output 1 Not connected Ground Alarm output 2 Not connected Buzzer Not connected Ground Critical alarm Not connected Major alarm Ground Not connected Ground
-Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output --Output --Output -Input --Output -Output ---A-43
417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Function Direction
Pin
Name
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
MIN_COM N/C WARN_COM GND ALM_O3 GND N/C N/C GND N/C
Minor alarm Not connected Warning alarm Ground Alarm output 3 Ground Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected
Output -Output -Output ------
ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a SCSI 68-pin female connector that carries the following groups of lines to the customer equipment:
Eight external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the XDM-300 platforms. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM-300 platform. Each input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customers facility. Eight sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Four outputs are allocated to each XDM-300 platform connected to the xRAP-B/xRAP-D. Eight sets of change-over relay contacts (four per platform) floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays, identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the corresponding alarm relays of XDM-300 platforms. Two sets of change-over relay contacts floating with respect to platform ground, which serve as Critical alarm buzzer activation signal. The relay is activated whenever a Critical alarm is detected in the corresponding platform. The signal can be used to activate a local buzzer (Critical buzzer) in the customer's alarms collecting system. Two lines for muting the Critical buzzer in the customer's alarms collecting system.
Relay contact ratings are 57.6 V in open state, and 1A in closed state.
A-44
417006-2311-0H3-B00
The following figure identifies the ALARMS connector pins as seen when looking into the connector. The table lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS connector. This table also lists the color of the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Network Solutions Division for connecting between the ALARMS connector and a distribution frame.
Figure A-19: ALARMS connector pin identification Table A-27: ALARMS connector pin assignment
Shelf 2
CRIT_NC
Critical alarm relay, Output normally closed contact Critical alarm relay, Output common contact Critical alarm relay, Output normally open contact Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Major alarm relay, common contact Major alarm relay, normally open contact Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Minor alarm relay, common contact Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Warning alarm relay, common contact Output
Black
2 3
CRIT_COM CRIT_NO
Brown Red
MAJ_NC
Orange
5 6
MAJ_COM MAJ_NO
Output Output
Yellow Green
MIN_NC
Output
Blue
8 9
MIN_COM MIN_NO
Output Output
Violet Gray
10
WARN_NC
Output
White
11
WARN_COM
Output
Pink
12
WARN_NO
Warning alarm Output relay, normally open contact
Light green
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-45
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Assignment
13
BUZZ_NC
Buzzer relay, normally closed contact Buzzer relay, common contact Buzzer relay, normally open contact Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output relay 1, common contact Output relay 1, normally open contact Output relay 2, normally closed contact Output relay 2, common contact Output relay 2, normally open contact Output relay 3, normally closed contact Output relay 3, common contact Output relay 3, normally open contact Output relay 4, normally closed contact Output relay 4, common contact Output relay 4, normally open contact
Output
Black/white
14 15
BUZZ_COM BUZZ_NO
Output Output
Brown/ white Red/white
16
ALMO1_NC
Output
Orange/ white Green/ white Blue/white
17 18
ALMO1_COM ALMO1_NO
Output Output
19
ALMO2_NC
Output
Violet/ white Red/black Orange/ black Yellow/ black Green/ black Gray/black
20 21
ALMO2_COM ALMO2_NO
Output Output
22
ALMO3_NC
Output
23 24
ALMO3_COM ALMO3_NO
Output Output
25
ALMO4_NC
Output
Pink/black
26 27
ALMO4_COM ALMO4_NO
Output Output
Pink/green Pink/red
28 29 30 31
ALMIN_1 ALMIN_2 GND ALMIN_3
External alarm input Input 1 External alarm input Input 2 ground External alarm input Input 3
Pink/violet Light blue Light blue/brown Light blue/red
A-46
417006-2311-0H3-B00
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Assignment Pin Designation Function
Direction
Wire color
32 33 34 Shelf 1 35
ALMIN_4 GND BUZZ_OFF CRIT_NC
External alarm input Input 4 ground Buzzer mute Output
Light blue/violet Light blue/black Gray/green Gray/red
Critical alarm relay, Output normally closed contact Critical alarm relay, Output common contact Critical alarm relay, Output normally open contact Major alarm relay, normally closed contact Major alarm relay, common contact Major alarm relay, normally open contact Minor alarm relay, normally closed contact Minor alarm relay, common contact Minor alarm relay, normally open contact Warning alarm relay, normally closed contact Warning alarm relay, common contact Output
36 37
CRIT_COM CRIT_NO
Gray/violet Light green/black Violet/black
38
MAJ_NC
39 40
MAJ_COM MAJ_NO
Output Output
Black/white dots Brown/ white dots Red/white dots Orange/ white dots Green/ white dots Blue/white dots Violet/ white dots White/ black dots Yellow/ black dots Green/ black dots Light blue/ black dots Pink/black dots
41
MIN_NC
Output
42 43
MIN_COM MIN_NO
Output Output
44
WARN_NC
Output
45
WARN_COM
Output
46
WARN_NO
Warning alarm Output relay, normally open contact Buzzer relay, normally closed contact Buzzer relay, common contact Buzzer relay, normally open contact Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output
47
BUZZ_NC
48 49
BUZZ_COM BUZZ_NO
Output Output
50
ALMO1_NC
Output
417006-2311-0H3-B00
A-47
XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color
Assignment
51 52
ALMO1_COM ALMO1_NO
Output relay 1, common contact Output relay 1, normally open contact Output relay 2, normally closed contact Output relay 2, common contact Output relay 2, normally open contact Output relay 3, normally closed contact Output relay 3, common contact Output relay 3, normally open contact Output relay 4, normally closed contact Output relay 4, common contact Output relay 4, normally open contact
Output Output
Red/black dots Orange/ black dots Violet/black dots Gray/black dots Orange/red dots Yellow/red dots Green/red dots Blue/red dots
53
ALMO2_NC
Output
54 55
ALMO2_COM ALMO2_NO
Output Output
56
ALMO3_NC
Output
57 58
ALMO3_COM ALMO3_NO
Output Output
59
ALMO4_NC
Output
Violet/red dots Gray/red dots White/red dots Pink/red dots Yellow/ white Gray/white Pink/white Brown/ black Blue/black Gray/white dots
60 61
ALMO4_COM ALMO4_NO
Output Output
62 63 64 65 66 67 68
ALMIN_1 ALMIN_2 GND ALMIN_3 ALMIN_4 GND BUZZ_OFF
External alarm input Input 1 External alarm input Input 2 ground External alarm input Input 3 External alarm input Input 4 ground Buzzer mute Output
A-48
417006-2311-0H3-B00
B
Standards and References
In this appendix:
Overview ........................................................................................................ B-1 Broadband Forum ........................................................................................... B-1 Environmental Standards ................................................................................ B-2 ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute ............................. B-2 IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission ........................................... B-3 IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers................................... B-4 IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force .......................................................... B-5 ISO: International Organization for Standardization ...................................... B-7 ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union ........................................... B-7 MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum ........................................................................ B-11 NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology................................ B-12 North American Standards ........................................................................... B-12 OMG: Object Management Group ............................................................... B-13 TMF: TeleManagement Forum .................................................................... B-13 Web Protocol Standards ............................................................................... B-13
Overview
The following is a list of standards and reference documents that relate to the XDM-300 family platforms. The standards are listed alphabetically by groups.
Broadband Forum

Af-phy-0064.000 ATM Forum E1 Physical Layer Interface. Af-phy-0086.000 ATM Forum IMA V1.0. Af-phy-0086.001 ATM Forum IMA V1.1. Af-phy-00121.00 ATM Forum Traffic Management Specifications V4.1.
ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary B-1
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Environmental Standards
EuP Directive 2005/32/EC: Ecodesign Requirements for Energy-Using Products. OHSAS 18001: Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems - Requirements. REACh Directive 2005/32/EC: Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals. RoHS Directive 2005/747/EC: Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment. WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EN 300 019-1-1: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Storage. EN 300 019-1-2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Transportation. EN 300 019-1-2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Stationary use at weather protected location. EN 300 019-2-3: Environmental Conditions and Environmental Tests for Telecommunications Equipment; Cold and Warm Starts. EN 300 019-2-3 Class 3.1E: Environmental Conditions for Central Office. EN 300 019-2-3 Class 3.3: Environmental Conditions for Remote Terminal. EN 300 132 -2: Environmental Engineering (EE); Power Supply Interface at the Input to Telecommunications Equipment. EN 300-166: Physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces for equipment using the 2 048 kbit/s based plesiochronous or synchronous digital hierarchies. EN 300 386: Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.
B-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
EN 300-417-2-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment. EN 300-417-5-1: Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment. EN 300-462-5-1: Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Generic requirements for synchronization networks. EN 300-689: 34 Mbit/s digital leased lines (D34U and D34S); Terminal equipment interface. EN 301-164: SDH leased lines connection characteristics. EN 301-165: SDH leased lines Network and Terminal interface presentation. EN 55022: Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment. ETR 114: Functional Architecture of SDH Transport Networks. ETR 275: Considerations on Transmission Delay and Transmission Delay value for components on connections supporting speech communication over evolving digital networks. FTZ 1TR9: Deutsche Telekom A.G. EMC Requirements. FTZ 153 TL 1part 1: Synchronous Multiplexing Equipment (SM) for Synchronous Multiplex Hierarchy.
IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 68: Environmental Testing. IEC 917: Modular Order for the Development of Mechanical Structures for Electronic Equipment Practices. IEC 3309: Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange between Systems High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) Procedures Frame Structure. IEC 9314-3: Information Processing Systems - Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Multiplex. IEC 9595, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Services. IEC 9596, Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Protocol. IEC 13239: Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems High-level data link control (HDLC) procedures.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
IEC 17025: General Requirements for Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories. IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products Part 1: Equipment Classification and Requirements. IEC 60825-2 (AS/NZS 2211.2): Safety of Laser Products Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber Communication System (OFCS). IEC/EN/UL 60950-1: Information Technology Equipment - Safety - General Requirements. IS 1249-1: Safety of Laser products: Equipment classification requirements and users guide.
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IEEE 802.1ad: Virtual Bridged Local Area NetworksRevisionAmendment 4: Provider Bridges. IEEE 802.1ag: Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management. IEEE 802.1D: Media access control (MAC) Bridges (Incorporates IEEE 802.1t and IEEE 802.1w). IEEE 802.1P: Traffic Class Expediting and Dynamic Multicast Filtering. IEEE 802.1Q: Virtual Bridged Local Area NetworksRevision. IEEE 802.1w: Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree. IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications. IEEE 802.3ad: Link Aggregation. IEEE 802.3ah: Ethernet in the First Mile (Link OAM). IEEE 802.3x: Full Duplex Operation and Flow Control Protocol.
B-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
IETF: Internet Engineering Task Force

RFC 1493: Definition of Managed Objects for Bridges. RFC 1643: Ethernet-like Interfaces. RFC 1662: PPP in HDLC-Life Framing. RFC 1757: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base. RFC 1823: LDAP Application Program Interface (API). RFC 1901: Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2. RFC 2108: Definitions of Managed Objects for IEEE 802.3 Repeater Devices using SMIv2. RFC 2251: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3) [specification of the LDAP on-the-wire protocol]. RFC 2252: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Attribute Syntax Definitions. RFC 2253: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): UTF-8 String Representation of Distinguished Names. RFC 2254: The String Representation of LDAP Search Filters. RFC 2255: The LDAP URL Format. RFC 2256: A Summary of the X.500(96) User Schema for use with LDAPv3. RFC 2401: Security Architecture for the Internet Protocol. RFC 2409: Internet Key Exchange Protocol (IKE). RFC 2474: Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers. RFC 2597: Assured Forwarding PHB Group. RFC 2615: PPP over SONET/SDH. RFC 2665: Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernet-like Interface Types. RFC 2674: Bridge MIB with VLAN/Traffic Classes/Multicast Extensions. RFC 2702: Requirements for Traffic Engineering Over MPLS. RFC 2737: Entity MIB (Version 2). RFC 2819: Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base. RFC 2829: Authentication Methods for LDAP.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
B-5
RFC 2830: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extension for Transport Layer Security. RFC 2863: Interfaces Group MIB. RFC 3014: Notification Log MIB. RFC 3031: Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture. RFC 3032: MPLS Label Stack Encoding. RFC 3246: An Expedited Forwarding PHB (Per-Hop Behavior). RFC 3270: Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Support of Differentiated Services. RFC 3377: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Technical Specification. RFC 3411: SNMP Framework MIB. RFC 3414: SNMP User-Based SM MIB. RFC 3415: SNMP Vies-Based ACM MIB. RFC 3443: Time To Live (TTL) Processing in Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) Networks. RFC 3812: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Traffic Engineering (TE) Management Information Base (MIB). RFC 3813: Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switching Router (LSR) Management Information Base (MIB). RFC 3916: Requirements for Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3). RFC 3985: Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Architecture. RFC 4090: Fast Reroute Extensions to RSVP-TE for LSP Tunnels. RFC 4125: Maximum Allocation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering. RFC 4126: Max Allocation with Reservation Bandwidth Constraints Model for Diffserv-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering & Performance Comparisons. RFC 4379: Detecting Multi-Protocol Label Switched (MPLS) Data Plane Failures. RFC 4448: Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Ethernet over MPLS Networks.
B-6
417006-2311-0H3-B00
IETF Drafts:

Martini encapsulation, draft-martini-l2circuit-encap-mpls. VPLS draft, draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-ldp. draft-ietf-pwe3-ethernet-encap. draft-sajassi-l2vpn-vpls-multicast-congruency. draft-ietf-l2vpn-vpls-mcast-reqts. draft-ietf-magma-snoop. draft-ietf-mpls-rsvp-te-p2mp. draft-vasseur-mpls-backup-computation.
ISO: International Organization for Standardization

A2LA: Accredited Laboratory for Electrical and Mechanical Testing. ISO 9001: Quality Management System Requirements. ISO 14001: Environmental Management Systems Requirements With Guidance for Use. ISO 27001: Information Security Management Systems Requirements. TL 9000, QuEST Forum: Quality Management System Requirements & Measurements Handbooks for the Telecom Industry.
ITU-T: International Telecommunication Union
G.650: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Parameters of Single-Mode Fibers. G.651: Characteristics of a 50/125 m Multimode Graded Index Optical Fiber Cable. G.652: Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable. G.653: Characteristics of a Dispersion-Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable. G.654: Characteristics of a Cut-off Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable. G.655: Characteristics of a Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable. G.661: Definition and Test Methods for the Relevant Generic Parameters of Optical Amplifier Devices and Subsystems.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
G.662: Generic Characteristics of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems. G.663: Application Related Aspects of Optical Fiber Amplifier Devices and Subsystems. G.664: Optical Safety Procedures and Requirements for Optical Transport Systems. G.671: Transmission Characteristics of Passive Optical Components. G.691: Optical Interfaces for Single Channel SDH Systems with Optical Amplifiers and STM-64 Systems (Draft). G.692: Optical Interfaces for Multi-Channel Systems with Optical Amplifiers. G.694.1: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: DWDM Frequency Grid. G.694.2: Spectral Grids for WDM Applications: CWDM Wavelength Grid. G.695: Optical Interfaces for Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing Applications. G.703: Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces. G.704: Synchronous Frame Structures Used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbps Hierarchical Levels. G.706: Frame Alignment and CRC Procedures Relating to Basic Frame Structure Defined in Rec G.704. G.707: Network Node Interface for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. G.709: Network Node Interface for OTN. G.752: Characteristics of digital multiplex equipments based on a second order bit rate of 6312 kbit/s and using positive justification. G.772: Protected Monitoring Points Provided on Digital Transmission Systems. G.774 & G774.n: SDH Information Model. G.775: Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals. G.781: Synchronization Layer Functions. G.783: Characteristics of SDH Equipment Functional Blocks. G.784: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Management. G.798: Characteristics of OTN Hierarchy Equipment Functional Blocks. G.803: Architectures of Transport Networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. G.805: Generic Functional Architecture of Transport Networks.
B-8
G.806: Characteristics of Transport Equipment Description Methodology and Generic Functionality. G.809: Functional Architecture of Connectionless Layer Networks. G.811: Timing Characteristics of Primary Reference Clocks. G.812: Timing Requirements of Slave Clocks Suitable for Use as Node Clocks in Synchronization Networks. G.813: Timing Characteristics of SDH Equipment Slave Clocks (SEC). G.823: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on the 2048 kbit/s Hierarchy. G.825: The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks Based on the SDH (Draft). G.8251: The Control of Jitter and Wander within the Optical Transport Network (OTN). G.826: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Digital Paths at or above the Primary Rate. G.828: Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International, Constant Bit Rate Synchronous Digital Paths. G.829: Error Performance Events for SDH Multiplex and Regenerator Sections. G.831: Management Capabilities of Transport Networks Based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). G.841: Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architectures. G.842: Inter-Working of SDH Protection Architectures. G.872: Architecture of Optical Transport Networks. G.874: Management Aspects of the Optical Transport Network Element. G.875: OTN Management Information Model for the NE View. G.957: Optical Interfaces for Equipment and Systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. G.959.1: Optical Transport Network Physical Layer Interfaces. G.975: Forward Error Correction for Submarine Systems. G.985: 100 Mbit/s point-to-point Ethernet based optical access system. G.7041: Generic Framing Procedure (GFP). G.7042: Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) for Virtual Concatenated Signals. G.7713: Distributed Connection Management. G.7713.2: RSVP-TE Implementation.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
B-9
G.7714: Generalized Automatic Discovery Techniques. G.7714.1: Protocol for Automatic Discovery in SDH & OTN network. G.7715: ASON Routing. G.7715.1: Based on PNNI, OSPF or IS_IS. G.8010/Y.1306: Architecture of Ethernet Layer Networks. G.8011/Y.1307: Ethernet Services Framework. G.8011.1/Y.1307.1: Ethernet Private Line Service. G.8011.2/Y.1307.2: Ethernet Virtual Private Line Service. G.8012/Y.1308: Ethernet UNI and Ethernet NNI. G.8261/Y. 1361: Timing and synchronization aspects in packet network. G.8262/Y. 1362: Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC). I.356: ATM Layer Cell Transfer Performance. I.361: ATM Layer Specification. I.371: Traffic Control and Congestion Control. I.610: ATM Operation and Maintenance Principles. M.3010: Principles for a Telecommunications Management Network. M.3013: Considerations for a Telecommunications Management Network. M.3100: Generic Network Information Model. M.3180: Catalogue of TMN Management Information. M.3200: TMN Management Services and Telecommunications Managed Areas: Overview. M.3300: TMN F Interface Requirements. M.3400: TMN Management Functions. Q.821: Alarm Surveillance. Q.822: Performance Monitoring. X.217: Open Systems Interconnection, Service Definition for the Association Control Service Element. X.219: Remote Operations - Model, Notation and Service Definition. X.227: Open Systems Interconnection, Connection-Oriented Protocol for the Association Control Service Element - Protocol Specification. X.229: Remote Operations: Protocol Specification. X.710: Open Systems Interconnection, Common Management Information Service.
B-10
417006-2311-0H3-B00
X.720: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Management Information Model. X.721 Information Technology: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Definition of Management Information. X.722: Open Systems Interconnection, Structure of Management Information - Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects. X.731: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - State Management Function. X.733: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Alarm Reporting Function. X.743: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Time Management Function. X.744: Open Systems Interconnection, Systems Management - Software Management Function. Y.1311: Network-based VPNs - Generic architecture and service requirements. Y.1710: Requirements for Operation & Maintenance functionality for MPLS networks. Y.1711: Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks.
MEF: Metro Ethernet Forum
MEF4 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 1: Generic Framework. MEF6 Metro Ethernet Services Definitions. MEF7 EMS-NMS Information Model. MEF9 Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI. MEF10 Ethernet Service Attributes. MEF11 User Network Interface (UNI) Requirements and Framework. MEF12 Metro Ethernet Network Architecture Framework Part 2: Ethernet Services Layer. MEF14 Test Suite for Ethernet Traffic Management.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
B-11
NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology

FIPS PUB 197: Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). FIPS PUB 140-2: Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules.
North American Standards

ANSI FCF1-2: Fiber Channel Physical Interface REV 10. ANSI T1.102: Digital hierarchy electrical interface. ANSI T1.105: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) - Basic Description including Multiplex Structure, Rates, and Formats. ANSI X3.296: Single-Byte Command code sets CONnection (SBCON) architecture. FCC CFR Title 47 Part 15: Radio Emission. FCC Part 101.147 Fixed microwave services: (i8, i7, K7, 7) NEBS GR1089 and GR63 (temperature aspect) NEBS Level 3 support for N.A. platforms. Rural Utility Service (RUS) Certification. Telcordia GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection. Telcordia GR-253-CORE: Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria. Telcordia GR-383-CORE: COMMON LANGUAGE Equipment Codes (CLEI Codes) Generic Requirements for Bar Code Labels. Telcordia GR-487-CORE: Generic Requirements for Electronic Equipment Cabinets. Telcordia GR-499-CORE: Transport System Generic Requirements (TSGR): Common Requirements. Telcordia GR-1089-CORE: Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment. Telcordia GR-1209-CORE: Generic Requirements for Passive Optical Components. Telcordia GR-1230-CORE: SONET Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring Equipment Generic Criteria.
B-12
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Telcordia GD-1244-CORE: Clock for the synchronization network: Common generic criteria. Telcordia GR-1312-CORE: Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber Amplifiers and Proprietary Dense Wavelength-Division Multiplexed Systems. Telcordia GR-1400-CORE: SONET Dual-Fed Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) Equipment Generic Criteria. Telcordia GD-2979-CORE: Common Generic Requirements for Optical Add-Drop Multiplexers (OADMs) and Optical Terminal Multiplexers (OTMs).
OMG: Object Management Group

Notification Service Specification V 1.0. The Common Object Request Broker: Architecture and Specification V 2.6.
TMF: TeleManagement Forum

TMF 513: MTNM Business Agreement Release 3.5. TMF 518: Framework Document Delivery Package (DDP) Business Agreement (BA) V1.1. TMF 518: Resource Provisioning DDP BA V1.0. TMF 608: Multi Technology Network Management Information Agreement V 2.1 and V 3.5. TMF 814: Multi Technology Network Management Solution Set V 2.1 and V 3.5. TMF 854: The MTOSI XML Solution Set Package Release 1.1.
Web Protocol Standards

W3C: World Wide Web Consortium

SOAP 1.1: Simple Object Access Protocol. WSDL 1.1: Web Services Description Language.
WS-I: Web Services Interoperability Organization
WS-I Basic Profile 1.1: Web Services Interoperability.
417006-2311-0H3-B00
B-13
B-14
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Index
1
19 in. Rack Installation 3-49
2
2 Mbps tests 7-6
3
34 Mbps tests 7-7
4
45 Mbps tests 7-7
A
About This Manual xiii Accessories 3-19 ACP100 Connectors A-32 Adding a Second TPU/OCU 5-34 Air Filter Preventive Maintenance 8-3 Alarm Cables 3-13 Alarm handling test 7-19 ALARM IN/OUT Connector A-35, A-39 Alarms client cable A-4 ALARMS Connector A-2, A-44 Assigning modules to slots 8-9 Attaching Protective Covers 3-59 Attaching TPUs/OCU to the XDM-300 Shelf 5-27 Attaching TPUs/OCUs to the shelf 5-27
B
Basic XDM-300 Shelf 2-2 BER and stability test 7-25 Broadband Forum B-1
C
Cables alarm 3-13 data 3-17 DC power 3-11
417006-2311-0H3-B00
electric traffic 3-14 grounding 3-9 management 3-13 optical fibers 3-16 PIM2_63S traffic 6-8 timing (clock) 3-14 Card and Module Installation 5-1 Cards 5-1 ECU 5-3 FCU 5-2 MXC300 5-4 Quad I/O 5-7 Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each Shelf 7-3 Cleaning Optical Connectors 3-5 Cleaning the air filter 8-5 Commissioning Tests 7-1 Connecting Alarm Cables 6-4 Connecting an optical fiber to a data module 6-22 Connecting DC Input Power Cables to the xRAP-D 3-55 Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU 6-18 Connecting Fibers and Cables in ETSI A Racks 6-1 Connecting I/O Protection Cables in the XDM-300 6-12 Connecting Management Cables 6-23 Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules and Cards 6-5 Connecting Power Cables 6-3 Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables 6-23 Connection via xRAP 1-11 Connector Pin Assignments A-1 Connectors ECU300/ECU300-F card A-2 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM A-31
I-1
Index
MXC300 DC input power A-9 PIM2_21 connection data A-10 PIM2_63/B connection data A-19 PIM2_63S connection data A-23 xRAP-100 A-33 xRAP-B A-42 Connectors Pin Assignment A-1
D
Data Cables for EISMBs, DIOMs, and MCSMs 3-17 Data Network Commissioning Tests 7-16 DC Power Cables 3-11 DC Power Warnings 1-12 DC Supply Circuit Connection to the Grounding Conductor 1-20 Document Conventions xiv Document Organization xiv
Expanded XDM-300 with I/O Protection 2-4 Expanding a PIM2_21 I/O Slot to 42 E1s 5-18 Extracting RJ-45 connectors 6-25 Extracting/Inserting DIN 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors 6-35 Extracting/Inserting LC connectors and SFPs 6-28
F
F-CHANNEL Connector A-7 FCU300 Card 5-2 Fibers and cables connecting 6-1, 6-9, 6-12, 6-18, 6-23 I/O protection cables 6-12 preparing 3-8 routing 6-6, 6-11, 6-21 Frame loss rate test 7-17
E
ECU300/ECU300-F Card 5-3 ECU300/ECU300-F Card Connectors A-2 EISMB/DIOM/MCSM Connectors A-31 Electric Safety Warning 1-16 Electric Traffic Cables 3-14 Environmental and Health Concerns 1-30 Environmental Considerations 4-8 Environmental Requirements 3-2 Environmental Standards B-2 Equipment Grounding Requirements 1-11 Equipment Installation 3-35 Equipment Installation Sequence 3-36 Equipment power-on test 7-10, 7-22 ETHERNET Connectors A-8 Ethernet Port Precautions 1-21 ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute B-2
G
General 1-26 General Safety Requirements 1-6 Grounding 3-9, 4-26 racks 3-48 RAP-4B 3-80 RAP-BG 3-74 XDM-300 shelf 4-26 xRAP-100 3-66 Grounding Cables 3-9 Grounding Requirements 1-8 Grounding the XDM-300 Shelf 4-26
I
Identification of TUV CE Listing 1-17 IEC International Electrotechnical Commission B-3 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers B-4
I-2
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Index
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force B-5 Input sensitivity test 7-9, 7-23 Installation (300/900)options 4-1 procedure 3-42 Installation Options 4-1 Installation Warning 1-5 Installing (300/900)Ancillary units 3-50 cable guide 3-86 cable slack tray 3-87 Cards 5-1 ECU 5-3 FCU 5-2 MXC300 5-4 Quad I/O 5-7 fiber guide 3-87 FST 3-89 Integrating equipment in one rack 4-12 Modules double-slot modules 5-19 I/O electrical, optical, CWDM, and electrical 5-14 OHU 5-18 SIM16_1 5-15 TPU 5-21, 5-23, 5-24, 5-26 ODF 3-91 OPP 3-94 PIM2_63S trafficcable box tray 3-88 Power sources 3-4 racks 3-44 RAP-4B 3-79 RAP-BG 3-72 SFP/XFP transceivers 5-17 the shelf in the rack 4-7 Typical XDM-300 installation 4-10 xRAP-100 3-65 Installing a TPU under the XDM-300 Shelf 5-31
Installing a TPU/OCU on the XDM-300 shelf 5-28 Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel 6-11 Installing Ancillary Units in Racks 3-50 Installing Double-Slot Modules 5-19 Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU 5-24 Installing Equipment Racks 3-44 Installing Extendable Rails 3-48 Installing Optical Amplifiers in the TPU 5-24 Installing Qad I/O Cards in Quad I/O Slots 5-9 Installing SFP/XFP transceivers in optical/CWDM modules and cards 5-17 Installing SIM16_1 modules in quad slots 5-15 Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU 5-23 Installing the Cable Guide 3-86 Installing the Cable Slack Tray 3-87 Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks 3-87 Installing the FST 3-89 Installing the ODF 3-91 Installing the OHU module 5-18 Installing the OPP 3-94 Installing the PIM2_63S Traffic Cable Box Tray 3-88 Installing the RAP-4B 3-79, 3-80 Installing the RAP-BG 3-72, 3-74 Installing the TC/TCF Module in the TPU Shelf 5-22 Installing the Vertical Air Filter 4-22 Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in Racks 4-7 Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in the Horizontal Position 4-14 Installing the XDM-300 Shelf in the Vertical Position 4-14 Installing the xRAP-100 3-65 Installing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers 3-70
I-3
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Index
Installing the xRAP-D 3-51 Installing TPU Modules 5-21 Installing Triple-Slot TPMs in the TPU 5-26 Installing XDM-300 Before You Start Safety Guidelines 1-1 Installing XDM-300 Cards 5-1 Installing XDM-300 Modules 5-12 Installing, Optical, CWDM, and Electrical I/O Modules 5-12 Integrating equipment in one rack 4-12 Integrating XDM-300 Shelves and Other Equipment in One Rack 4-12 Intended Audience xiii Introduction 2-1 IOP hardware protection test 7-13 ISO International Organization for Standardization B-7 ITU-T International Telecommunication Union B-7 ITU-T/Telcordia Statutory Warnings and Requirements 1-19
M
Main Equipment Dimensions 3-2 Maintenance 8-1 onsite troubleshooting 8-12 preventive 8-2 replacing cards and modules 8-20 replacing RAP components 8-27 test equipment, tools and materials 8-1 traffic monitoring system 8-6 Maintenance action handling test 7-24 Maintenance actions tests 7-15 Management Cables 3-13 Measuring Optical Levels 7-5 MEF Metro Ethernet Forum B-11 Modules double-slot modules 5-19 I/O electrical, optical, CWDM, and electrical 5-14 OHU 5-18 SIM16_1 5-15 TPU 5-21, 5-23, 5-24, 5-26 Monitoring Modules Traffic 8-11 Monitoring options 8-10 Monitoring Signal Levels 8-10 MSP test 7-12 MS-SPRing test 7-12 MXC redundancy test 7-15 MXC300 Card 5-4 MXC300 DC Input Power Connectors A-9
J
Jewelry Removal Warning 1-7
L
Laser Classification 1-22 Laser Device Operating Precautions 1-24 Laser Information 1-22 Laser Safety Requirements 1-22 Laser Safety Statutory Warning 1-23 Layout of XDM-300 Horizontal Installation in ETSI A Racks 4-2 Layout of XDM-300 Vertical Installation in ETSI A Racks 4-6 LOS detection test 7-22 Loss of Signal (LOS) detection test 7-8
N
Network Commissioning Tests 7-6 Network timing synchronization test 7-8 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology B-12 North American Standards B-12
I-4
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Index
O
Obtaining Technical Documentation xvi OMG Object Management Group B-13 Onsite Troubleshooting 8-12 Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing 6-1 Optical Fibers 3-16 Optical Network Commissioning Tests 7-20 Optical power measurement test 7-21 Outline of Installation Procedure 3-42 Overview xiii, 1-1, 3-1, 7-1, 8-1, A-1, B-1
Q
Quad I/O Cards 5-7 Qualified Personnel Warning 1-4
R
Rack Alarm Panel Power and Alarm Connection Options 3-33 Rack Floor Marking 3-44 Rack Grounding 3-48 Rack Grounding Requirements 1-9 Rack Installation 3-44 19 3-49 concrete floors 3-45 extendable rails 3-48 floating floors 3-47 floor marking 3-44 grounding 3-48 suspended overhead tray assembly 3-48 wooden floors 3-46 Rack Installation on Concrete Floors 3-45 Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended) Floors 3-47 Rack Installation on Wooden Floors 3-46 RAP input power cables 3-12 RAP-4B 3-30 RAP-4B Connectors A-38 RAP-BG 3-29 Recommended Cleaning Methods 8-4 Related Documentation xv Replacing cards 8-20 circuit breakers 8-28, 8-29 modules 8-20 RAP components 8-27 Replacing Cards and Modules 8-20 Replacing ECU300/ECU300-F Cards 8-24 Replacing I/O Modules 8-25 Replacing MXC300 Cards 8-21 Replacing RAP Components 8-27
I-5
P
Path protection and nonretrieval test 7-11 Path protection test 7-23 Personnel Training 1-27 Physical Location 3-4 PIM2_21 Connection Data A-10 PIM2_42 Connection Data A-13 PIM2_63/B Connection Data A-19 PIM2_63S Connection Data A-23 Platform DC Input Power Connectors A-42 Platform Installation 4-1 Platform overview 2-2, 2-6 Power Sources 3-4 Power Supply Requirements 1-11 Preliminary Preparations 3-35 Preparations for installation 3-1, 3-5, 3-6, 3-8, 3-35, 4-1, 4-8 Preparing Cables and Fibers 3-8 Preparing DC Input Power Cables 3-52, 3-73, 3-79 Preventive Maintenance 8-2 Principles of Operation 8-6 Protection against Electrostatic Discharge 1-26
417006-2311-0H3-B00
Index
Replacing SFP/XFP Transceivers 8-26 Replacing the FCU300 8-27 Replacing the NVM on MXC300 Cards 8-23 Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers 8-28 Replacing xRAP-D Circuit Breakers 8-29 Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials 8-1 Response to events 8-9 Routing and Connecting Cables to Data Modules (EISMBs/DIOMs/MCSMs) 6-21 Routing and connecting coaxial cables 6-11 Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to Electrical Modules 6-6 Routing and connecting multipair cables 6-6 Routing and Connecting the Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S 6-9
Stability test 7-19 Stabilization time 8-9 Standards and References B-1 Support xvi Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly 3-48 System recovery and reset tests 7-18
T
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors A-7 Technical Assistance xvi Test Equipment 7-2 Test equipment setup 7-6 Test setup and required test equipment 7-20 Throughput and latency tests 7-16 Timing (Clock) Cables 3-14 TMF TeleManagement Forum B-13 To Check DC Voltage Polarity 3-85 Tool kit 6-24 Tool Kit 6-24 Tools and test equipment 3-5 Tools and Test Equipment 3-5 TPM2_42_2 Protection Assignment for the XDM-300 6-17 Traffic Cable for PIM2_63S 6-8 Traffic monitoring 8-6, 8-9, 8-10 modules traffic monitoring 8-11 options 8-10 principles of operation 8-6 signal levels monitoring 8-10 Traffic Monitoring System 8-6 Traffic stability test 7-10 Training for Laser Safety 1-23 Transmission alarm handling tests 7-14 Troubleshooting 8-12 Troubleshooting Management Communication 8-19 Troubleshooting Power Problems 8-13 Troubleshooting the Timing Subsystem 8-17
417006-2311-0H3-B00
S
Safety and Workmanship 8-20 SDH Commissioning Tests 7-6 SDH tests 7-7 Selecting a channel 8-8 Selecting a module 8-8 Severity assignment test 7-14 SHELF Alarm Connectors A-43 SHELF ALARM Connectors A-33, A-38 Shelf DC Input Power Connectors A-33 Shelf power cables 3-12 Shelf Power-On Test Procedure 7-6 Shelf types basic 2-2 expanded 2-4 Site Commissioning Tests 7-3 Site Preparation 3-1 Site Preparation and Rack Installation 3-1
I-6
Index
Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic Alarms 8-18 Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators 8-14 Typical XDM-300 Installation 4-10
X
XDM Rack Installation Options 3-7 XDM-300 1 1 protection scheme connections 6-14 2 protection scheme connections 6-15 3 protection scheme connections 6-16 XDM-300 Accessories 3-19 XDM-300 Horizontal Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence 3-37 XDM-300 I/O Protection Options 2-2 XDM-300 Platform Overview 2-1 XDM-300 Shelf with CWDM Networking Capabilities 2-6 XDM-300 Vertical Shelf and Accessories Installation Sequence 3-40 xRAP-100 3-26 xRAP-100 alarms cable A-5 xRAP-100 Connectors A-33 xRAP-D 3-19 xRAP-D Connectors A-42
U
UL/TUV Equipment Grounding Requirements 1-18 UL/TUV Overcurrent Protection Requirements 1-18 UL/TUV Requirements for Grounded Conductors 1-19 UL/TUV Statutory Warnings and Requirements 1-17 Unpacking and Performing Visual Inspection 3-6 Use of Temporary EPA 1-28
V
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks 7-4
W
Warning Definition 1-2 Warning Label 1-17 Warning Labels for Laser Products 1-22 Web Protocol Standards B-13 Work Arrangements within a Temporary EPA 1-30
417006-2311-0H3-B00
I-7
Index
I-8
417006-2311-0H3-B00

XDM-300 IMM ETSI B00 8.2.1-8.2.2 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XDM-300 IMM ETSI B00 8.2.1-8.2.2 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

XDM-300

Installation and Maintenance Manual

Installing XDM-300: Before You Start Safety Guidelines ..... 1-1

Site Preparation and Rack Installation .................................. 3-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Platform Installation ................................................................ 4-1

Card and Module Installation ................................................. 5-1

Optical Fiber and Cable Installation and Routing................. 6-1

Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 7-1

Maintenance ............................................................................. 8-1

Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. A-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Standards and References .................................................... B-1

Index .......................................................................................... I-1

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

About This Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

About This Manual

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Installation Maintenance Additional functionality

Menu > Option

Italics Borders around text

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or interesting points of information.

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

About This Manual

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

About This Manual

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Obtaining Technical Documentation

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

Installing XDM-300: Before You Start Safety Guidelines

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

WARNING: XDM Equipment has two power sources.

NOTE: This chapter includes translations of some of the

Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish

ADVARSEL: Dette symbol betyder fare. Der er risiko for

WAARSCHUWING: Dit symbool betekent gevaar. U

VAROITUS: Tm merkki tarkoittaa vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa,

ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary

XDM-300 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Installing XDM-300: Before You Start Safety Guidelines

ATTENTION: Ce symbole est signe de danger. Vous risquez

WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden

AVVERTENZA: Questo simbolo indica una situazione di

AVISO: Este smbolo significa perigo. Encontra-se numa